JP7181240B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player.

A game machine such as a pachinko game machine has been proposed that is capable of executing a black-and-white mode effect that determines whether or not a color-to-monochrome (black-and-white) preview effect changes from color to monochrome (black-and-white), and a black-and-white mode effect in which the background image is monochrome. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-2224 A

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, the production becomes monotonous, and there is room for improvement in improving the entertainment.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of a game through presentation.

(A) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display based on entry of a game medium into a starting area and being able to be controlled to an advantageous state for a player,
During a predetermined period from the timing corresponding to the entry of the game medium into the starting area to the specific timing during execution of the target variable display, the plurality of effect displays displayed during the predetermined period are changed to a common color. a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect to cause
A special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect at the specific timing,
The first period and the second period partially overlap, and the first period starts before the second period and ends before the second period,
There are a plurality of end timings of the first period, and depending on which end timing, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The special effect executing means does not execute the special effect in the variable display prior to the target variable display during the predetermined period,
The special production execution means is
When the game medium enters the starting area when the display result of the variable display is not displayed in a stop display period, the special effect is started at the timing of entry,
When the game medium enters the starting area during the stop display period, the special effect is started at the timing after the stop display period ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention provides a starting area (for example, a first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, a second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, etc.) as a game medium. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display based on the passing of a game ball (for example, etc.) and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, A predetermined period (for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02) from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the starting area to a specific timing (for example, timing T02 corresponding to the establishment of the ready-to-win state) during execution of the target variable display etc.), special effect executing means (for example, CPU 77AK131 for executing steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42) capable of executing a special effect (for example, color change effect, etc.) for changing a plurality of effect displays displayed during the predetermined period to a common color etc.), and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, notice after reach is established) at the specific timing, and the special effect execution means is provided with the target variable during the predetermined period. No special effect is executed in the variable display preceding the display (for example, when the color change effect is being performed at step 77AKS35).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while reducing the processing load of the effect of changing the color.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the various circuits mounted in the production|presentation control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production|presentation control command. It is a figure which shows the execution example of a step-up notice. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of execution of story announcement; It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a pending|holding display data storage part. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of pre-reading notice setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution when color change production|presentation is not performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect execution when monochrome change is executed; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution when gold color change is performed. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a battle zone production|presentation determination process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the advance notice during all pattern fluctuation|variation, and the advance notice after establishment of a ready-to-win state. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example when a battle zone production|presentation is started. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of timing control; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example corresponding to a variable display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect display. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of color change synthesis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an active display mode determination table; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of monochrome effect setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining whether or not to execute a monochrome effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining the end timing of monochrome effect; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of change production setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting processing such as monochrome effect; 8A and 8B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode change pattern determination table and an active display change timing determination table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, there is provided a ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls to the first and second big prize openings (attackers). Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls won by winning the 2nd starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big prize mouth and the 2nd big prize mouth (attacker) account for the total number of prize balls. percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in an off state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the design.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), after executing the initialization process (step S6), the setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The process during the small hit opening of step S119 is performed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic part regarding setting suggestion effect)
During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate. For example, the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process includes a stop symbol determination process. The stop symbol determination process may be a process capable of determining a combination of decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decoration symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decoration symbols. In the stop symbol determination process, when the super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is executed, it may be determined that the setting suggesting effect can be executed at a predetermined rate based on the determination of any ready-to-win symbol. The ready-to-win pattern is the same decoration pattern stopped and displayed in accordance with the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R among the final stop pattern at the time of the ready-to-win failure and the final stop pattern at the time of the big win.

In the stop pattern determination process, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win pattern can be determined by referring to a ready-to-win pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win pattern. . The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the ready-to-win pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the highest, the number 6, the number 5, As the number 4, the number 3, and the number 2 become, the variable display result in the case of stop display as a ready-to-win pattern becomes "big win", and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state decreases, corresponding to the number 1. Even if the determination ratio of the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is set so that the variable display result when the decoration pattern to be the winning pattern is stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern is "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is the lowest. good. In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win", the same number of determination values may be assigned to decorative patterns to be ready-to-win symbols. The number of determination values assigned to each decorative design to be a ready-to-win pattern may be different, or the number of determination values to be assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative design to be a ready-to-win design. Depending on the type of jackpot, the determination ratio of decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may be different.

In the stop symbol determination process, when the determined ready-to-win symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined whether or not to perform the setting suggestion effect. Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by, for example, referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As the presence/absence of the setting suggesting effect, one of "no effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed, or "with effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is executed is determined. At this time, when it is determined that "there is an effect", the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . The set value may be specified using the stored data in such a predetermined area.

When the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, the setting suggestion pattern is determined. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . For example, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 may be provided as a plurality of suggested setting patterns. These setting suggestion patterns may have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not the pattern display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

When the setting suggesting performance using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is high, and when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-3, the set value is the highest. 6 is determined. In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A pattern display mode for suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 as well as suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as decoration patterns corresponding to the numbers is included. When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

The setting-suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern display color is not changed to copper because the pattern RE-1 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed to copper color or not. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the pattern display color is not changed to gold because the pattern RE-3 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is changed to gold as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

The setting suggesting effect is instead of changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of decorative light emitters such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. It may be a combination of some or all of which may change the rendering mode of any rendering device. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for effect execution. It suffices if it can be executed when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of suggested setting patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display It may be possible to make the decision possible only when the result is a "big hit" and to make the decision impossible when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the current setting.

In the effect process during variable display executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, when it is the change effect period, control to execute the change effect is performed. The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. The change effect period may be set to different time lengths according to the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a portable terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as Networking Service and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the effect (unfavorable effect) that is often performed even in a disadvantageous situation does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effect is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect that is advantageous to the player, and to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the images including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game arcade side.

The setting suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by any desired effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a pre-reading notice effect, in addition to a change effect in which the display color of the ready-to-win pattern can be changed, and the set value of the pachinko game machine 1. You may enable it to make a suggestion about. It may be an effect in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested after the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is performed during execution of the variable display. In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state is continuously made after making the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state, or the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state is continuously made and the pachinko game is performed. It may also include a case of suggesting a setting value of the gaming machine 1 . In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion about the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion about the control of the big win game state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is made. It may include a case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different decision ratios depending on whether or not the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

During execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the pachinko machine executes a big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and a big hit effect (such as a effect corresponding to the first and second rounds). A setting value of 1 may be suggested. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot game state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may be one that suggests a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 77AK to 79AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 77AK100, an input circuit 77AK121, a memory controller 77AK122, a production data memory 77AK123, a ROM77AK124, a RAM77AK125, and a watchdog timer 77AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 77AK100 includes a CPU 77AK131, a VDP 77AK132, a voice processing circuit 77AK133, a lamp control circuit 77AK134, a motor control circuit 77AK135, and a built-in memory 77AK136. The VDP 77AK132 includes a data transfer circuit 77AK141, a preloader 77AK142, a graphics decoder 7AK143, a drawing circuit 77AK144, a VRAM 77AK145, and a display drive circuit 77AK146. The audio processing circuit 77AK133 includes an audio decoder 77AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 77AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It is possible to control the execution of an effect using some or all of a plurality of effect devices such as the LED for the effect and the movable member for effect such as the movable body 32 . The production control microprocessor 77AK100 may be configured as an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling execution of production is integrated on one chip. In addition, the production control microprocessor 77AK100 includes a CPU77AK131, a VDP77AK132, and a built-in memory 77AK136. It may be provided outside the 77AK100. Alternatively, part or all of the input circuit 77AK121, memory controller 77AK122, effect data memory 77AK123, ROM77AK124, RAM77AK125, and watchdog timer 77AK126 may be provided inside the one-chip effect control microprocessor 77AK100.

The input circuit 77AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 77AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 77AK122 executes various processes including reading and writing of data stored in the effect data memory 77AK123 in response to request signals supplied from the effect control microprocessor 77AK100. The effect data memory 77AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 77AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, if sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is prepared. good. These sprite image data can be used as character image data. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 77AK123. It is good if there is As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. The still image data includes planar still image data capable of generating a still image corresponding to a two-dimensional plane, and stereoscopic image data capable of generating a stereoscopic image, which is a still image corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space. good too.

In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 77AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 77AK123 may store part or all of the lamp driving data used for driving the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The performance data memory 77AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 77AK123 may include a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, even a non-volatile semiconductor memory is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which the progress of the presentation is controlled.

ROM77AK124 comprises the program memory which memorize|stores computer programs, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. The ROM77AK124 may have the same configuration and functions as those of the ROM121. The RAM 77AK 125 is configured using, for example, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) and provides a work area to the CPU 77AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 77AK 100 . Also, the RAM 77AK125 provides a storage area that can temporarily store data read from the performance data memory 77AK123. The RAM77AK125 may have the same configuration and functions as the RAM122. When the program in the CPU77AK131 goes out of control, the watchdog timer 77AK126 forcibly resets the CPU77AK131 and restarts the effect control microprocessor 77AK100.

The ROM 77AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the computer program for the performance control. For example, in the ROM77AK124, the CPU77AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 77AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is list data in which a series of commands to be executed by the VDP77AK132 are described according to the order of drawing processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. Alternatively, while the display list includes the command group for display control, some or all of the command group for voice control, the lamp control command group, and the motor control command group are , may be included in a command list or list data different from the display list. The VDP77AK132 only needs to be able to cooperatively control electrical components for presentation using a display list, other command list or data list. The RAM 77AK 125 only needs to be able to temporarily store programs and various data used to control electrical components for presentation.

CPU77AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 77AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 77AK 124 . The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data read process in which the CPU77AK131 reads out fixed data from the ROM77AK124, a variable data write process in which the CPU77AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM77AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various data temporarily stored in the RAM77AK125 by the CPU77AK131. variation data reading processing for reading variation data, reception processing for the CPU 77AK131 to receive various signals input from the outside, transmission processing for the CPU 77AK131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing. good too. CPU77AK131 should just be provided with the structure and function similar to CPU120 for production|presentation control.

The VDP 77AK 132 determines control details for image display in the image display device 5 based on the display list and register settings from the CPU 77AK 131 . For example, the VDP 77AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays. The VDP77AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP77AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The VDP 77AK 132 may have the same configuration and functions as the VDP included in the display control unit 123 .

The data transfer circuit 77AK141 can control various data transmission/reception by the VDP77AK132. Data transmission/reception by VDP77AK132 should just include data transmission/reception between the internal circuits of the performance control microprocessor 77AK100 and data transmission/reception between the performance control microprocessor 77AK100 and an external device. The internal circuit of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100 capable of controlling data transmission/reception by the data transfer circuit 77AK141 may include, for example, a built-in memory 77AK136, a VRAM77AK145, or one or both of these. The external device of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100 capable of controlling data transmission/reception by the data transfer circuit 77AK141 may include, for example, effect data memory 77AK123, RAM77AK125, or one or both of these.

The preloader 77AK142 can analyze the display list, read the referenced image data from the effect data memory 77AK123, and transfer it to the external RAM77AK125 or internal VRAM77AK145. When such transfer is performed, the preloader 77AK142 outputs a display list in which the reference destination of the image data is rewritten to the post-transfer address. Random access to the effect data memory 77AK123 occurs while the drawing circuit 77AK144 is executing the drawing process. descend. Therefore, the preloader 77AK142 transfers image data and display lists to the external RAM 77AK125 and the internal VRAM 77AK145 in advance, so that drawing processing and the like can be executed at high speed.

The graphics decoder 77AK143 receives moving image data from among the image data read out from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like, separates it into video data and audio data, and then decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data. and output. The video data output from the graphics decoder 77AK143 is supplied to the rendering circuit 77AK144. The audio data separated from the moving image data is supplied to the audio decoder 77AK151 of the audio processing circuit 77AK133. The graphics decoder 77AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the rendering circuit 77AK144.

The drawing circuit 77AK144 can read the display list and execute drawing processing according to the order in which the command group is described. The rendering circuit 77AK144 may include, for example, a display list analysis section, a geometry pipeline, a triangle rasterizer, a texture sampler, a frame buffer sampler, a pixel generation section, and the like. The display list analysis unit analyzes the drawing command of the display list. The geometry pipeline performs vertex transformations and lighting operations. The triangle rasterizer generates source and destination addresses when rendering a triangle. A texture sampler samples textures and performs bilinear filtering. The framebuffer sampler obtains the framebuffer and Z-buffer used for inter-pixel operations. The pixel generator performs image processing such as alpha blending to generate pixel data to be written to the frame buffer.

The drawing commands described in the display list are control commands, index table control commands, environment setting commands, texture setting commands, inter-pixel operation commands, special commands, primitive drawing commands, texture load commands, tertiary It suffices if it can be classified as an original drawing command. The control system command is a group of commands for controlling drawing. Index table control commands are a group of commands for controlling and managing index tables. The index table is set corresponding to a plurality of index spaces constructed in the storage area of the VRAM77AK145, and enables management of the indexes allocated to each index space. The environment setting commands are a group of commands for setting the execution environment for drawing processing. Texture setting commands are a group of commands for setting textures. Inter-pixel calculation system commands are a group of commands for controlling calculations between pixels. A special command is a group of commands for special control. Primitive drawing commands are a group of commands for controlling drawing processing using a plane image. The texture load commands are a group of commands for controlling texture loading to the VRAM77AK145. The 3D drawing commands are a group of commands for controlling drawing processing using a stereoscopic image.

The VRAM 77AK145 is a data memory from which data can be read and written by some or all of the data transfer circuit 77AK141, graphics decoder 77AK143, drawing circuit 77AK144, and display drive circuit 77AK146. The VRAM 77AK145 can store video data decompressed and decoded by the graphics decoder 77AK143. In addition, the VRAM 77AK145 can store palette data used for drawing processing by the drawing circuit 77AK144. The VRAM77AK145 can set a frame buffer and a Z buffer used for drawing processing. In addition, the VRAM77AK145 can store display lists for drawing, compression-encoded lamp drive data, and the like. A plurality of spaces for storing data can be constructed in the VRAM77AK145. These spaces become index spaces. The data transfer circuit 77AK141, the graphics decoder 77AK143, the rendering circuit 77AK144, and the display drive circuit 77AK146 may specify the index space and execute reading and writing of data.

Each of the plurality of index spaces may be secured as any one of the arbitrary area, page area, and active area control area. An arbitrary area can set a top address and a horizontal size to secure an index space in an arbitrary area of the VRAM77AK145. For example, the arbitrary area can secure the index space by designating the base address in the VRAM77AK145 in units of 2048 bits and by designating the horizontal size of the two-dimensional space in units of 256 bits. The page area has a unit space of, for example, 4096 horizontal lines and 128 vertical lines, and index spaces can be secured in multiples of the unit space. For image data stored in the arbitrary area or page area, it is possible to set the index number to be accessed when a drawing command that writes parameters to the index table or a drawing command that obtains parameters from the index table is executed. can. The active area control area can automatically set the start address and horizontal size to secure the index space. The active area control area can automatically set the start address and horizontal size when a drawing command for transferring texture data to the VRAM77AK145 is executed. An index number is automatically assigned in the active area control area.

For example, once the display frame buffer and the corresponding Z buffer are set, they are less likely to change dynamically, so it is suitable to provide them in an arbitrary area. On the other hand, the drawing frame buffer and the corresponding Z buffer may change in size dynamically. Therefore, if the frequency of dynamic change is high, it is suitable to provide it in the page area. On the other hand, if the size is approximately the same over a plurality of frames, it is suitable to provide it in an arbitrary area. Moving image data without palette data or inter-frame reference, or video data decompressed and decoded by the graphics decoder 77AK143 only needs to be guaranteed to exist in the VRAM 77AK145. It is suitable to store in an area. Depending on the degree to which the size of video data with inter-frame references changes dynamically, it may be appropriate to store it in an arbitrary area (if it is difficult to change) or in the page area. There is a case (if it is easy to change).

A frame buffer such as a display frame buffer or a drawing frame buffer provides a virtual drawing space in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP77AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) constructed using primitives such as points, lines, and polygons including triangles. bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by . A drawing area can be set in the virtual drawing space of the frame buffer, and by setting base point coordinates and diagonal point coordinates in the virtual drawing space, clipping is performed in the drawing area, which is the range to be actually drawn.

The display drive circuit 77AK146 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 77AK146 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP77AK132. do it.

The audio processing circuit 77AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP 77AK132, compression-encoded audio data, and the like. The audio data output from the graphics decoder 77AK143 of the VDP 77AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 77AK151 of the audio processing circuit 77AK133. The audio decoder 77AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. The audio processing circuit 77AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data not included in moving image data. The voice data memory may be included, for example, in the performance data memory 77AK123 or the external ROM 77AK124. The audio processing circuit 77AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory according to commands and register settings from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP 77AK132.

The lamp control circuit 77AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 77AK134 decompresses and decodes the lamp drive data according to commands and register settings from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP 77AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 77AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, rotation angle (phase), etc. for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 77AK135 may generate motor control data according to commands and register settings from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP 77AK132 and output the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 77AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 77AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 10-2 shows a configuration example AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK. In the configuration example AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a small pattern display area AKA1 as a first interface display area and a variable display corresponding display area AKA2 as a second interface display area. The variable display compatible display area AKA2 includes an active display portion AKB0, a first reserved display portion AKB1, and a second reserved display portion AKB2.

In the active display section AKB0, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display portion AKB1, pending display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending according to the number of first pending memories. In the second pending display portion AKB2, a pending display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending according to the number of second pending memories. As described above, the active display portion AKB0, the first reserved display portion AKB1, and the second reserved display portion AKB2 can perform active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display section AKB1 is also called "first pending display". The pending display in the second pending display section AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The first pending display part AKB1 can display, for example, pending displays associated with the pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. The second pending display part AKB2 can display, for example, pending displays associated with the pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the second pending display is left aligned. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. In the active display part AKB0, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display part AKB1 corresponding to the start of the first special game is started, and the second special game is started. Active display corresponding to the second pending display erased (digested) in the second pending display section AKB2 corresponding to the start is started. The active display that can be displayed by the active display unit AKB0 may be any display that has the same color and pattern as the first reserved display and the second reserved display. For example, the active display is common to the first reserved display and the second reserved display. may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect. In the active display part AKB0, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

At a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern display area AKA1 is arranged. The small pattern display area AKA1 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. there is In the small pattern display area AKA1, variable display of small patterns is executed corresponding to variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size from the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the decoration pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decoration pattern. Since this is an image showing a number and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the performance image showing the decorative pattern. Since small patterns are displayed in a simple manner in the small pattern display area AKA1, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misunderstanding the display contents and display results of the small patterns. In the small pattern display area AKA1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns that serve as reduced identification information is performed, and determined small patterns that serve as display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, an effect display using a background image is performed according to background image data prepared in advance. In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative design is variably displayed or stopped. In this embodiment, control is performed to variably display or stop display a decoration pattern whose display color is red as the normal color.

FIG. 10-3 shows a configuration example of an effect control command used as a command at the time of winning a prize for the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK. In the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, based on the game ball passing through the starting area, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command specifying the occurrence of starting winning is performed. will be A start winning designation command is prepared in advance as an effect control command for designating the occurrence of starting winning. In addition, in the starting winning judgment process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command specifying the number of pending memories is performed. A reserved memory count notification command is prepared in advance as an effect control command for specifying the reserved memory count. Furthermore, in the start winning determination process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command specifying the determination result of the prefetch determination is performed. As an effect control command for designating the judgment result of the prefetch judgment, a judgment result command at the time of winning is prepared in advance.

FIG. 10-3(A) shows a setting example of a starting point winning designation command, a reservation storage number notification command, and a winning judgment result command. The starting point winning designation command includes a command B100H that becomes a first starting point winning designation command and a command B200H that becomes a second starting point winning designation command. Note that the suffix H indicates a hexadecimal number. The reserved storage number notification command includes a command C1XXH as a first reserved storage number notification command and a command C2XXH as a second reserved storage number notification command. In addition, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the reserved storage number notification command, different EXT data (for example, one of 00H to 04H) is set according to the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. The winning judgment result command may be a command C4XXH including a value set according to the judgment result of the prefetch judgment.

When the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting area at the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, The first starting condition is established by determining that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The first starting condition is a condition for executing a special symbol game (first special symbol game) using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first starting condition is established, the main board 11 transmits a first start winning designation command, a winning determination result command, and a first reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加When the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting area at the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs , the second starting condition is established by determining that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The second starting condition is a condition for executing a special symbol game (second special symbol game) using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second starting condition is satisfied, the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the second starting opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the second reserved storage number notification command are transmitted.

On the side of the effect control board 12, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first starting opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition can be detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. can. Establishment of the first starting condition is due to the game ball passing through the first starting area. The establishment of the second starting condition is due to the game ball passing through the second starting area. Thus, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the first start region. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the second start region. The judgment result command at the time of winning is when the first start condition is established or when the second start condition is established, the random number for the game extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. The result (winning determination result) is notified to the effect control board 12 side. The first reserved storage number notification command notifies the first reserved storage number. The second reserved memory count notification command notifies the second reserved memory count.

FIG. 10-3(B) exemplifies the content of the notification by the award determination result command. Among the winning determination result commands, command C402H, command C403H, and command C404H may be sent when the random number for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range, and the display result of the special figure game A determination result at the time of winning is notified that control is not performed in a big win game state by determining "losing". On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number for judging the special figure display result is within the jackpot judging range, and when the display result of the special figure game is determined as "big hit", it is controlled to the jackpot game state. The result of determination at the time of winning (variable display content is "jackpot") is notified. It should be noted that the command C400H notifies that the winning determination is restricted. Command C402H is sent when the random number for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach determination range at the time of loss, and the winning determination result that the variation pattern with super reach is determined at the time of loss (variable display content is Notify "super reach confirmation when losing"). On the other hand, the command C403H is sent when the random number for determining the variation pattern is within the reach decision range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning that the variation pattern with the reach effect at the time of loss is determined (variable The display content notifies you of "reach determination when losing"). Furthermore, the command C404H is sent when the random number for determining the variation pattern is neither within the range of determination of super reach nor within the determination range of reach at the time of losing, and there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach effect may not be determined. Notifies the time determination result (variable display content is "general at the time of failure"). In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random numbers extracted at the start of winning to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether or not to be determined as a specific variation pattern. is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

When the judgment result at the time of winning is "general at the time of losing", there is a case where the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode when notified. Even in this case, the reach effect of super reach is not executed, and the determination value that is compared with the random value for determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern determination table is assigned to the variation pattern so that the reach effect of normal reach is performed. All you have to do is The reach decision range compared with the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode even if the number of retained memories is a predetermined number (such as "3") or more. It is set so as to be a range in which it is determined that it will be determined. Therefore, if the random number for determining the variation pattern is neither within the super reach determination range nor within the reach determination range at the time of losing, for example, when the number of pending memories is less than a predetermined number, the decorative pattern is displayed variable at a predetermined rate may be determined as a variation pattern that is a reach mode. In this way, when the random number for determining the variation pattern is neither within the super reach determination range nor within the reach determination range at the time of losing, the variation pattern that becomes the reach mode executes the reach production of the normal reach, while the super reach It is sufficient if it is a variation pattern that does not execute the reach effect. In such a setting, the winning judgment result of "general when losing" is that the variable display of the decorative pattern is non-reach, or even if the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the reach effect of normal reach is executed. to be notified.

FIG. 10-4 shows an execution example of the step-up notice regarding the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK. A step-up notice is included in the notice performance executable by the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In the step-up notice, the effect mode of the notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, changes step by step. The effect mode that changes in the step-up notice is not limited to the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, but includes the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. or a combination of some or all of these. In this embodiment, when the step-up notice is executed, during the variable display of the decoration pattern, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect image surrounded by the display frame that is the outer frame of the rectangular shape of the predetermined display color. The display content (display mode) of is switchably displayed according to a predetermined order, and the effect operation is performed such that the effect mode changes in a plurality of stages to step up. The effect image displayed when the step-up notice is executed includes an outer-frame partial image showing the display frame and an inner-frame partial image used for switching display in step change. The in-frame partial image may be a still image that is still displayed at each step of the step change, or may be a moving image that is displayed as an animation at each step of the step change.

When the step-up notice is executed, the maximum number of steps is determined to be one of "1" to "4". The maximum number of steps indicates the number of steps in which the effect mode can be changed from the start of the step-up notice to the end. Note that the maximum number of steps is not limited to "1" to "4", and may be any number of steps based on any design. FIG. 10-4(A) shows an execution example AKC1 for displaying the effect image of the first step corresponding to the number of steps "1" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the first stage. FIG. 10-4(B) shows an execution example AKC2 for displaying a second step effect image corresponding to the step number "2" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the second stage. FIG. 10-4(C) shows an execution example AKC3 for displaying the effect image of the third step corresponding to the number of steps "3" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the third stage. FIG. 10-4(D) shows an execution example AKC4 for displaying the effect image of the fourth step corresponding to the number of steps "4" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the fourth stage.

In execution example AKC1, an outer-frame partial image with a display color of blue is displayed and a frame-inside partial image of the first step is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "1" in the first step in the step-up notice. If the maximum number of steps is "1", the step-up notice ends only with execution example AKC1. On the other hand, when the maximum number of steps is "2" or more, the display of execution example AKC1 is switched to the display of execution example AKC2. In execution example AKC2, an outer-frame partial image with a display color of green is displayed and a frame-inside partial image of the second step is displayed corresponding to the step number "2" of the second stage in the step-up notice. If the maximum number of steps is "2", the step-up notice ends after execution example AKC2. On the other hand, when the maximum number of steps is "3" or more, the display of execution example AKC2 is switched to the display of execution example AKC3. In execution example AKC3, an outer-frame partial image with a display color of red is displayed and a frame-inside partial image of the third step is displayed corresponding to the step number "3" of the third stage in the step-up notice. If the maximum number of steps is "3", the step-up notice ends after execution example AKC3. On the other hand, when the maximum number of steps is "4", the display of execution example AKC3 is switched to the display of execution example AKC4. In execution example AKC4, an outer frame partial image with a display color of gold is displayed and an inner frame partial image of the fourth step is displayed corresponding to the step number "4" of the fourth stage in the step-up notice.

When the step-up notice is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the step-up notice is not executed. Further, when step-up notice is executed, when the maximum number of steps in step-up notice is large, the degree of expectation for big win is higher than when the maximum number of steps in step-up notice is small. In this manner, the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" may differ depending on whether or not the step-up notice is executed and the mode of presentation in the step-up notice.

FIG. 10-5 shows an execution example of the story announcement regarding the feature parts 77AK-79AK. A story notice is included in the notice performance executable by the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In the story notice, the effect mode of the notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, continuously changes with the passage of time. In the story announcement, it is sufficient that a series of stories progresses due to such a continuous change in presentation mode. The story preview is included in the full-screen preview production. The full-screen preview effect is a preview effect that covers the entire screen by displaying a preview effect image over the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. By displaying such an effect image for notice, the display mode of the decoration pattern may be made difficult to see. The effect of displaying the effect image for notice may include a blackout effect of displaying a covering image such as a darkened image. The covering image may be an image of a predetermined color or pattern, such as an image of a luminous mode or an image of a frozen mode, or may be an image in which the display mode of the decorative pattern becomes invisible. The full-screen announcement effect may be a panel display format step-up announcement, cut-in announcement, mini-game announcement, development announcement, or the like. A notice effect that is displayed on a part of the display screen, and at least a notice effect that makes it impossible to see the decorative pattern, or a notice effect that makes it difficult to see, such as the display screen and the decorative pattern can be seen through. may be

When a story notice is executed, one of a plurality of story notice patterns is determined according to the progress of a series of stories. It suffices if the effect mode of the story notice is different according to the plurality of story notice patterns. In the execution example shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect image of execution example AKD11 is displayed first regardless of the plurality of story announcement patterns. After that, depending on the plurality of story announcement patterns, the effect image of execution example AKD21 may be displayed or the effect image of execution example AKD22 may be displayed. After the effect image of execution example AKD21 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD31 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD32 is displayed, and the effect image of execution example AKD32 is displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns. In some cases, an effect image of AKD33 is displayed. After the effect image of execution example AKD22 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD32 may be displayed or the effect image of execution example AKD33 may be displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns. After the effect image of execution example AKD31 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD41 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD42 is displayed, and the effect image of execution example AKD42 is displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns. There are cases in which the effect image of AKD43 is displayed and in which case the effect image of execution example AKD44 is displayed. After the effect image of execution example AKD32 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD42 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD43 is displayed, and the effect image of execution example AKD43 is displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns. In some cases, an effect image of AKD44 is displayed. After the effect image of execution example AKD33 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD43 may be displayed or the effect image of execution example AKD44 may be displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns.

When the story notice is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the story notice is not executed. Further, among the cases where the story notice is executed, when the performance image of execution example AKD44 is displayed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is the highest, and when the performance image of execution example AKD43 is displayed, the expectation of execution example AKD44 is the highest. The degree of expectation for big win is lower than when the performance image is displayed, and when the performance image of execution example AKD42 is displayed, the degree of expectation for big win is lower than when the performance image of execution example AKD43 is displayed, and executed. When the effect image of example AKD41 is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is lower than when the effect image of example AKD42 is displayed. In this way, it is sufficient that the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" varies depending on whether or not the story notice is executed and the effect mode in the story notice. The story announcement may be performed by playing back and displaying a moving image, or may be performed by displaying an animation of a still image.

In the command analysis process executed in step S75 of the production control main process shown in FIG. Among the empty areas in the first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control buffer setting section) of the internal memory 77AK136, the first start A prize designation command, a judgment result command at the time of prize winning, and a first reserved storage number notification command are stored in order. In addition, in the command analysis process, when the winning determination result command and the second pending storage number notification command are received together with the second start opening winning designation command, a predetermined area of the RAM77AK125 or the internal memory 77AK136 (for example, the effect control buffer setting section) Among the empty areas in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, etc., in the storage area with the smallest pending display number, which is the buffer number, the second start winning designation command and the judgment result command at the time of winning, the second reserve Store the number-of-stored notification commands in order. In the first start winning command buffer, one set of effect control commands (first start winning designation command and winning determination result command, first reserved storage number notification A storage area is secured so that commands) can be associated and stored. CPU77AK131, according to the receiving order, the production control command received when the first start winning a prize is generated, empty area in the storage area corresponding to the reserved display number "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the first start winning a prize are stored in order from the beginning. The pending display number in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning corresponds to the first pending memory number. In the second start winning command buffer, one set of effect control commands (second start winning designation command and winning determination result command, notification of the number of second pending memories) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start winning A storage area is secured so that commands) can be associated and stored. The CPU77AK131 stores the effect control commands received when the second start winning is generated, according to the order of reception, in the storage area corresponding to the reserved display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. are stored in order from the beginning. The pending display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second pending memory number.

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the pending display data storage unit AKM1. The pending display data storage unit AKM1 may be provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 77AK125 or the internal memory 77AK136 (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit). The pending display data storage unit AKM1 displays the first Various data for performing 1 suspension display and various data for performing 2nd suspension display in 2nd suspension display part AKB2 are memorize|stored as suspension display data. As the pending display data storage unit AKM1, there are a first pending display data storage unit corresponding to the pending storage display of the first special game and a second pending display data storage unit corresponding to the pending storage display of the second special game. It is sufficient if it is provided. In the pending display data storage unit AKM1, for example, storage for storing data indicating the judgment result at the time of winning and the pending display image so as to be identifiable in association with the pending number in the first pending display unit AKB1 or the second pending display unit AKB2. Space is reserved. The pending display data storage unit AKM1 uses part or all of the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer (for example, the storage area for the determination result command at the time of winning), or the first start winning command It may be configured as a storage section separate from the buffer and the second start winning command buffer.

The winning determination result that can be stored by the reserved display data indicates the determination result of the prefetch determination specified based on the winning determination result command. Winning determination results specified based on the winning determination result command include "big win", "super reach determination when losing", "reach determination when losing", and "general when losing". When the winning judgment result of "big hit" is notified by the winning judgment result command, it is specified that the display result of the variable display to be judged is "big hit". When one of the following is notified by the judgment result command at the time of winning, "Super reach when losing", "Reach when losing", or "General when losing" is notified, the display result of the variable display targeted for judgment is ” is specified. The pending display image memorizable by the pending display data is displayed on the first pending display part AKB1 and the second pending display part AKB2, thereby making it possible to recognize the presence or absence of a special game that has not yet started and the number of pending games. It is a production image.

The notice effects executable by the pachinko game machine 1 include pending display notice and active display notice. The pending display notice is, as an example of a prefetching notice effect, at least one of the first pending displays in the first pending display portion AKB1 or at least one of the second pending displays in the second pending display portion AKB2. is changed to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, the variable display corresponding to the holding display gives notice of a ``big hit'' at a predetermined rate and control to a big win game state. Due to the pending display notice, the display color of the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started is changed to a specific color (e.g. blue, green, red, gold, etc.) different from the predetermined color (e.g. white) normally used. It is only necessary to make it possible to recognize a change in the display mode of the pending display by allowing the variable display to suggest that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit" at a predetermined rate. Alternatively, by changing the display pattern in the pending display to a specific pattern (such as a cherry blossom pattern) that is different from the normal predetermined pattern (such as a solid color), the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be possible to suggest something higher than . Alternatively, by using a display form showing a predetermined message (for example, "chance", "heat", "heat", etc.) as a pending display, the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" is increased. It may also be possible to suggest that the A change in the pending display in the pending display notice is also called a “suspended display change”.

The active display notice changes the active display in the active display part AKB0 to a display mode different from the normal display mode, so that a "big win" occurs at a predetermined rate in the variable display during execution after the start condition is established, resulting in a big win. It announces that it will be controlled to a game state. When changing the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed by the active display notice, the display color, display pattern, presence or absence and content of the message, etc. are changed in the same way as the pending display notice. It is sufficient if it can be changed to something different from. A change in the active display in the active display announcement is also called an "active display change". The display mode of the active display that can be changed by the active display notice may include a specific display mode different from the display mode of the pending display that can be changed by the pending display notice. The display mode of the pending display changeable by the pending display notice may include a unique display mode different from the display mode of the active display changeable by the active display notice.

FIGS. 10-6 (B1) to (B5) show a plurality of effect images that can be used for pending display and active display. In this embodiment, five display images AKE0 to AKE4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for pending display and active display. The number of display images that can be used for pending display or active display is not limited to five, and may be any number of images based on any design. The display image AKE0 is an effect image for a round plain white display. The display image AKE1 is an effect image in the case of performing a circular plain blue display. The display image AKE2 is an effect image in the case of performing a circular plain green display. The display image AKE3 is an effect image in the case of performing a round plain red display. The display image AKE4 is an effect image in the case of performing a round plain gold display. The normal display mode in the pending display and the active display is a round plain white display. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is gold, the degree of expectation for a big win is the highest. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is red, the expectation of a big hit is lower than when the display color is gold. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is green, the expectation of a big hit is lower than when the display color is red. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is blue, the expectation of a big win is lower than when the display color is green. The display color of the pending display and the active display is normally white, and in this case the expectation of a big win is the lowest.

In the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK, it is possible to execute a color change effect at a predetermined rate based on the game ball passing through the start area provided in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. The color change performance is a special performance for changing a plurality of performance displays displayed during the period from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the starting area to the color change end timing to a common color. The color change end timing may be, for example, the timing at which the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state in the variable display to change the target. In this embodiment, the color change rendering is executed in the case of executing a monochrome change in which a plurality of rendering displays are changed to a grayscale display color, and in the case of executing a gold-based transformation in which a plurality of rendering displays are changed into a gold-based display color. Including if and. Whether or not to execute the color change performance and whether to execute the monochrome change or the gold type change can be determined at different ratios according to the winning determination result indicated by the winning determination result command. In addition, in the color change effect, when the normal color of multiple effect displays is changed to a grayscale display color, and when the normal color of multiple effect displays is changed to a gold-based display color , and a multi-gradation monochromatic image expressed in monochromatic colors with different lightnesses are displayed. However, in the following embodiments, the case where a plurality of effect displays are changed to a grayscale display color is referred to as a monochrome change, and the case where a plurality of effect displays are changed to a gold-based display color is referred to as a gold-based change. , each color change effect will be described separately.

In the characteristic parts 77AK to 79AK, a battle zone effect can be executed as a specific effect different from the special effect. The battle zone effect suggests control to a big win game state by displaying a prepared effect image different from the normal time based on the result of winning judgment corresponding to the pending display. The battle zone effect is, for example, a specific effect whose execution is started corresponding to the start of the variable display and which is in a mode of effect corresponding to the battle zone during the period until the end timing of the battle zone. The timing at which the battle zone ends may be the timing corresponding to the derivation display of the display result in the variable display that becomes the target variation. Whether or not to execute the battle zone effect can be determined at different ratios according to the winning judgment result stored in the reserved display data storage unit AKM1.

FIG. 10-7(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 9 as the advance notice setting process. In this pre-reading notice setting process, it is determined whether or not a start-up winning command has been received (step AKS001). The start-up winning command includes a start-up winning designation command, a pending memory count notification command, and a winning determination result command. In step AKS001, for example, it is confirmed whether or not a start opening winning designation command, a winning determination result command, and a pending storage number notification command are newly stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not the command is received at the time of starting winning. At this time, if no command is received (step AKS001; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is command reception (step AKS001; Yes), the content of notification by the received command is specified (step AKS002). For example, the determination result at the time of winning is specified as the content of notification by the determination result command at the time of winning. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a color change limit (step 77AKS01). At step 77AKS01, it is determined that there is a color change limitation when a predetermined limitation condition for color change presentation is satisfied. The limiting condition for the color change effect is met, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed. In addition, the condition for restricting the color change effect may be established when the content of the notification by the winning determination result command is during the winning determination restriction. The condition for restricting the color change effect is that the winning judgment result stored in the pending display data storage unit AKM1 includes a winning judgment result different from "general at loss" before the current winning judgment result. may hold if The condition for restricting the color change effect is satisfied when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "jackpot" or when the ready-to-reach effect of super reach is executed in response to the variable display being executed. may The limiting condition for the color change effect may be established when the execution of the color change effect has already started.

If there is no color change limitation (step 77AKS01; No), a color change effect is determined (step 77AKS02). The decision of the color change effect includes the decision of whether or not to execute the color change effect, and the decision of whether to execute the monochrome change or the golden change when the color change effect is executed. Just do it. At step 77AKS02, execution of the color change effect can be determined when the command for start winning is received, so the color change effect can be executed from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the start area. At this time, one of "no change" that does not execute the color change effect, "monochrome change" that executes the monochrome change in the color change effect, and "golden change" that executes the golden change in the color change effect is determined by Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of step 77AKS02 is "no change" (step 77AKS03).

When the decision result of the color change effect is "monochrome change" or "golden color change" and not "no change" (step 77AKS03; No), the fixed decorative pattern which becomes the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns. is being derived and displayed (step 77AKS04). When the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed (step 77AKS04; Yes), standby setting for color change effect is performed (step 77AKS05). At step 77AKS05, for example, a color change standby flag may be set to ON. The color change standby flag may be provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting section, etc.) of the RAM 77AK125 or the built-in memory 77AK136.

When the final stop symbol is not being derived and displayed (step 77AKS04; No), control is performed to start execution of the color change effect (step 77AKS06). In step 77AKS06, control processing is performed when the execution of the color change effect is started by the drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. When the color change effect is executed, the effect image in the effect display is generated using the same image data as in the normal case where the color is not changed. On the other hand, when the color change effect is executed, the color in the effect display is changed by performing drawing processing different from the case where the normal color is not changed. The drawing process including the execution of the color change effect is executed by the VDP77AK132 based on the drawing command from the CPU77AK131. When the execution of the color change effect is started, an effect image notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed in a predetermined color change start notification period. The control of step 77AKS06 may include control for displaying on the screen of the image display device 5 an effect image notifying the start of the color change effect by the drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. The effect image notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed with priority over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect, such as the effect image displayed in the step-up notice, for example. Thus, it is sufficient that the start notification effect for notifying the start of the color change effect can be executed with priority over the predetermined advance notice effect.

Following step 77AKS06, voice output continuation control is performed (step 77AKS07). At step 77AKS07, when the color change effect is executed, a control process is performed to continue the effect with the same sound as before the execution. When the execution of the color change effect is started, a sound notifying the start of the color change effect may be output during a predetermined color change start sound output period. In this case, after the end of the color change start sound output period, control may be performed so that the same sound effect as before the color change effect is resumed. Even in this way, it is possible to execute a common sound presentation before and after the color change start sound output period. The sound effect using the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R by the control of step 77 AKS07 is not affected even when the color change effect is executed, and is common to the case where the color change effect is not executed. can be executed in the mode of production. In this way, during the period from the start of execution of the color change effect to the end of the execution of the color change effect after the end of the color change start voice output period, the effect is common to the period in which the color change effect is not executed. It suffices if the voice effect can be executed in any manner.

If there is a color change limitation in step 77AKS01 (step 77AKS01; Yes), or if "no change" in step 77AKS03 (step 77AKS03; Yes), after setting step 77AKS05 and controlling step 77AKS07, After performing the update setting of the pending display at the time of starting winning (step AKS003), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When the number of first reserved memories increases by 1 due to the passage of the game ball through the first start winning hole, the first reserved display is displayed by adding a new first reserved display in the first reserved display part AKB1. It should be incremented by 1. When the number of second reserved memories is increased by 1 due to the passage of the game ball through the second start winning hole, the second reserved display is displayed by adding a new second reserved display in the second reserved display part AKB2. It should be incremented by 1. The display mode of the first pending display and the second pending display may be determined to be any one of the display images AKE0 to AKE4 to be the pending display image at a predetermined ratio according to the result of determination at the time of winning. At the beginning of the empty area in the pending display data storage unit AKM1, the winning determination result specified from the winning determination result command and the pending display data indicating the pending display image determined in step AKS003 are stored. Let it be.

FIG. 10-7(B) shows a determination example AKG01 of the color change effect. At step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the presence or absence of the color change effect is determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the result of determination at the time of winning. For example, numerical data representing random numbers for color change effect determination are extracted, and a prepared color change effect determination table stored in advance in the ROM 77AK124 or the like is referred to. Thus, it is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of the color change performance, i.e., whether or not to execute the color change performance, and whether to execute the monochrome change or the golden color change when executing the color change performance. In the determination example AKG01 of the color change effect, "no change" that does not execute the color change effect, or "monochrome change" that executes the monochrome change and "golden change" that executes the golden change among the cases where the color change effect is executed. ” is determined. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "super reach confirmation when losing", the decision rate of "no change" is 80%, the decision rate of "monochrome change" is 20%, and the decision rate of "golden change" is 80%. The determination rate is 0%. In addition, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the decision rate of "no change" is 40%, the decision rate of "monochrome change" is 58%, and the decision rate of "golden color change" is 2%. If the result of determination at the time of winning is other than the above, the determination rate of "no change" is 100%, and it is always decided not to execute the color change effect. By such setting, when the color change performance is executed, the display result of the variable display becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when the color change performance is not executed. Also, when the color change effect is executed, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is higher than when the color change effect is not executed. The display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and the ratio of control to the big win game state differs between when the monochrome change is executed and when the golden color change is executed as the color change effect. When a golden color change is executed as the color change effect, it is determined that the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and the game state is controlled to the big win game state. By the color change effect, it is possible to suggest that the game is controlled to a big hit game state at a predetermined rate. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the color change effect and improve the game interest.

In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when it is determined in step 77AKS01 that there is a color change restriction, step 77AKS02 is not executed, so it is not decided to execute the color change effect. Since the limiting condition of the color change effect is satisfied within the range that the battle zone effect is being executed, there is a limit that the color change effect is not executed in this range. This restricts the execution of the color change effect after the start of the battle zone effect. In step 77AKS01, when the execution of the color change effect has already started, regardless of whether the color change effect is a monochrome change or a golden color change, it may be determined that the color change is restricted. , it may be determined that there is a color restriction only when the color change effect is a golden color change. When the gold color change in the color change effect has already been executed, it is determined that the color change is restricted, and the new color change effect is restricted so as not to be executed, thereby stopping the color change effect of the gold color change. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity due to the problem, and to appropriately improve the amusement of the game. The golden color change in the color change effect is a color change effect with a high expectation of a big hit, such as the fact that it is determined to be controlled to the big win game state, so by restricting the execution of the new color change effect, It is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big win game state from being spoiled. If the monochrome change in the color change effect has already been executed, the decision is made in step 77AKS02, and the color change effect is changed from the monochrome change to the golden change based on the determination of "golden change" to execute the golden change. Control to change to may be performed. On the other hand, if the determination by 77AKS02 is not "golden color change", control may be performed to continue the monochrome change in the color change effect that has already been executed. In this way, among a plurality of types of color change effects, after the execution of monochrome change with relatively low expectation of big win is started, it is possible to execute gold color change with relatively high expectation of big win. Since the player's expectation for the big winning game state is heightened step by step, the player's attention to the execution contents of the color change presentation is heightened, and the amusement of the game can be appropriately improved.

In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when it is determined in step 77AKS04 that the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed, step 77AKS06 is not executed, so execution of the color change effect is not started. There is a limitation that the color change effect is not executed while the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed. Incidentally, when it is determined in step 77AKS04 that the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed, the execution of the color change effect can be started in response to the start of the next variable display.

FIG. 10-8 shows an effect execution example when the color change effect is not executed. In the effect execution example 77AKH01 shown in FIG. 10-8(A), the variable display of the decorative design is executed, and the decorative design is displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. A performance image corresponding to the step number "1" of the step-up notice is displayed while all the symbols are fluctuating. In the effect execution example 77AKH01, a sound effect is also executed in which the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-8(B), the game ball passes through the first starting area at the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this starting winning, it is decided at step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process that the color change effect is not executed "no change".

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS02, in the effect execution example 77AKH02 shown in FIG. 10-8(C), each of the multiple effect displays continues or progresses while the colors in the multiple effect displays remain normal. For example, an effect image corresponding to the step number "2" of the step-up notice is displayed. This effect image includes an outer frame partial image whose display color is green. Also, the background image is displayed in normal colors. In the variable display of decorative patterns, a decorative pattern with a display color of red is displayed as the normal color. Even in the small pattern display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display corresponding display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area, the effect display corresponding to the small pattern, suspension display, and active display is performed in normal colors. In the effect execution example 77AKH02, a sound effect is also executed in which the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After that, in the effect execution example 77AKH03 shown in FIG. 10-8(D), the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decoration symbols is completed. Corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern, the variable display of the small patterns also ends, and the determined small patterns are derived and displayed in the small pattern display area AKA1. The background image is displayed in normal colors as in the production execution examples 77AKH01 and 77AKH02. The decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed is displayed in red as the normal color. Also in the display area AKA2 for variable display, effect display corresponding to the suspension display and the active display is performed in the normal color. In effect execution example 77AKH03, a sound effect is also executed in which the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

FIG. 10-9 shows an effect execution example when monochrome change is executed among color change effects. In effect execution example 77AKH11 shown in FIG. 10-9(A), similarly to effect execution example 77AKH01, variable display of decoration patterns, step-up notice, and background image display are executed, and effect displays corresponding to each are performed. ing. Also, from the speakers 8L and 8R, a sound effect is executed in which the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output in the same manner as in the effect execution example 77AKH01. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-9(B), the game ball passes through the first starting area at the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this starting winning, at step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process, "monochrome change" is determined to execute monochrome change among the color change effects.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS02, in effect execution example 77AKH12 shown in FIG. 10-9(C), the colors in a plurality of effect displays are changed to a common grayscale display color. A grayscale display color has a common color attribute in that it is an achromatic color with a saturation of 0% in, for example, an HSL (Hue Saturation Lightness) color space or an HSV (Hue Saturation Value) color space. . Note that the method of specifying the color attribute is not limited to the HSL color space or the HSV color space. Any color system such as the *b* color system may be used. In any color space or color system, a plurality of effect displays may be changed to a common color by monochrome change. For example, the background image is displayed in a grayscale display color different from the normal color. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed in a grayscale display color different from the normal color. In the case of monochrome change, the small pattern display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display support display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area may be maintained without changing the normal color. In this case, the display mode of the small symbols, the suspended display, and the active display may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode, for example, by changing the shape corresponding to the monochrome change.

In step 77AKS06 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect, such as the effect image displayed in the step-up notice, is preferentially displayed over the effect display in the predetermined notice effect. , the effect control accompanying the start of the color change effect may be performed. In effect execution example 77AKH12, even if step-up notice is executed in the same way as effect execution example 77AKH02, the effect image announcing the message "Monochrome time start!!" is displayed in priority over this step-up notice. The effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed in a grayscale display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the grayscale display color. The effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . With such a display, when the color change effect is started, the scene in which the display color is changed can be concealed, thereby suppressing the sense of incompatibility caused by the change in the display color. When an effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect may be interrupted by stopping the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. After the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is interrupted in this way, when the display of the effect image for informing the start of the color change effect is erased, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is continued from the point of suspension, Execution of the predetermined advance notice effect may be restarted. Alternatively, the execution of the interrupted predetermined notice effect may be ended as it is. Further, when an effect image for informing the start of the color change effect is displayed, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is advanced by advancing the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect on the back side (back side) of this display. The display of the effect image for informing the start of the color change effect may be given priority over the display. In this way, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect progressing on the far side may be entirely invisible or partly visible by displaying the effect image notifying the start of the color change effect. may When a performance image notifying the start of the color change performance is displayed, the performance display in the predetermined advance notice performance is reduced compared to when the performance image is not displayed, and the performance display in the predetermined notice performance is reduced. , priority may be given to the display of an effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect. When an effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is advanced with a higher transparency than when this effect image is not displayed, so that the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is more transparent than the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. , priority may be given to the display of an effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect. In addition, when an effect image notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, arbitrary display control is performed to lower the visibility of the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect than when the effect image is not displayed. The display of the effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be prioritized over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. The predetermined notice effect may be a notice effect with a lower degree of expectation for a big hit than the color change effect. In step 77AKS01 of the pre-reading notice setting process, when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "jackpot" or when the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed, the limiting condition of the color change effect is established. Then, the predetermined notice effect that is being executed when the execution of the color change effect is started should be a notice effect with a low degree of expectation for a big hit. When a performance image for informing the start of the color change performance is displayed, the performance image for informing the start of the color change performance is prioritized over the performance display in the predetermined advance notice performance with a lower expectation for the big win than the color change performance. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation for the big win game state and improve the game interest.

At step 77AKS07 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process, control is performed to continue the voice output. As a result, in effect execution example 77AKH12, as in effect execution example 77AKH02, a sound effect of outputting the sound of music phrase PH02 from speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Therefore, the voice effect can be executed in a common voice output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without executing the color change effect or the color is changed after the color change effect is executed.

After that, in the effect execution example 77AKH13 shown in FIG. 10-9(D), the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decoration symbols ends. Corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern, the variable display of the small patterns also ends, and the determined small patterns are derived and displayed in the small pattern display area AKA1. The background image is displayed in a grayscale display color following the effect execution example 77AKH12. The decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are also displayed in a grayscale display color following the effect execution example 77AKH12. In the small pattern display area AKA1 and the variable display corresponding display area AKA2, effect display corresponding to small patterns, suspension display and active display is performed in normal colors. In effect execution example 77AKH13, as in effect execution example 77AKH03, an audio effect is executed in which the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R. In this case also, the voice effect is executed in a common voice output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without executing the color change effect or the color is changed after the color change effect is executed. can be done.

FIG. 10-10 shows an effect execution example when a golden color change is executed among the color change effects. In effect execution example 77AKH21 shown in FIG. 10-10(A), similarly to effect execution example 77AKH01, variable display of decoration patterns, step-up notice, and background image display are executed, and effect displays corresponding to each are performed. ing. Also, from the speakers 8L and 8R, a sound effect is executed in which the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output in the same manner as in the effect execution example 77AKH01. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-10(B), the game ball passes through the first starting area at the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this starting prize, in step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process, "golden color change" is determined to execute a gold color change among the color change effects.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS02, in effect execution example 77AKH22 shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the colors of the plurality of effect displays are changed to a common golden display color. Gold display colors have a common color attribute in that the hue is within the range of 51°±5% in 360° notation, for example, in the HSL color space and the HSV color space. It should be noted that the method of specifying the color attribute may be the same as in the case of monochrome change. Further, the common color attribute may have a single hue value (for example, only 51°), or may have a wider hue within a predetermined range. It is only necessary for the player to recognize the commonality with the case where the hue change effect is not executed in each effect display by making the saturation and lightness different within the range where the hue is common. For example, the background image has a golden display color that is different from the normal color, and the difference in saturation and lightness in each pixel means that the same background image is displayed as when the color change effect is not executed. , become recognizable to the player. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display color is gold, which is different from the normal color, and the common decorative pattern is displayed when the color change effect is not executed due to the difference in the saturation and brightness of each pixel. becomes recognizable by the player. In the case of a gold color change, the display color of the small pattern display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the display area AKA2 which corresponds to the variable display which is the second interface display area are changed to a gold color different from the normal color. It should change. At step 77AKS02, only when the result of judgment at the time of winning is "big hit", it is possible to decide to "golden type change", so when the gold type change is executed, it is possible to be controlled to the big win game state. Determine. Therefore, even if the small symbols, pending display, and active display are changed to a golden display color different from the normal color, the display result of the variable display is finally "big win" and is controlled to the big win game state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress discomfort caused by a change in display color. In the case of the golden color change, the display mode of the small symbols, the suspended display, and the active display may be changed to a display mode different from the normal time by changing the shape corresponding to the gold color change, for example.

In step 77AKS06 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect, such as the effect image displayed in the step-up notice, is preferentially displayed over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. , the effect control accompanying the start of the color change effect may be performed. In effect execution example 77AKH22, even when the step-up notice is executed in the same way as effect execution example 77AKH02, the effect image announcing the message "Gold time start!!" is displayed in priority over the step-up notice. The effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed in a golden display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the gold display color. The effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . With such a display, when the color change effect is started, it is possible to hide the scene where the display color is to be changed, thereby suppressing the sense of incongruity caused by the change of the display color.

At step 77AK07 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process, control is performed to continue the voice output. As a result, in effect execution example 77AKH22, as in effect execution example 77AKH02, an audio effect of outputting the sound of music phrase PH02 from speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Therefore, the voice effect can be executed in a common voice output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without executing the color change effect or the color is changed after the color change effect is executed.

After that, in the effect execution example 77AKH23 shown in FIG. 10-10(D), the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decoration symbols ends. Corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern, the variable display of the small patterns also ends, and the determined small patterns are derived and displayed in the small pattern display area AKA1. The background image is displayed in a golden display color following effect execution example 77AKH22. The decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are also displayed in a golden display color following the effect execution example 77AKH22. In the small symbol display area AKA1 and the display area AKA2 corresponding to the variable display, following the effect execution example 77AKH22, the effect display corresponding to the small pattern, the suspended display and the active display is performed in a golden display color. In effect execution example 77AKH23, as in effect execution example 77AKH03, a sound effect of outputting the sound of music phrase PH03 from speakers 8L and 8R is executed. In this case also, the voice effect is executed in a common voice output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without executing the color change effect or the color is changed after the color change effect is executed. can be done.

FIG. 10-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In this variable display start setting process, the final stop design, etc., which will be a fixed decorative design as a variable display result of the decorative design, is determined (step AKS011). If the CPU 77AK 131 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, good. When the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are set to send the command at the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the performance control board 12 . The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state ends becomes a time saving state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable probability state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", different (mismatched) decoration symbols in the "left" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5R are determined as final stop symbols. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the same (matching) decorative design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R is determined as the final stop design. In this case, among the confirmed decorative patterns, the middle confirmed decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined as a decorative pattern different from the left and right confirmed decorative patterns. be done. If the variable display content is "non-variable (big hit)" or "variable (big hit)", the same ( match) is determined to be the final stop symbol. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the game is in the state of the big win or in the state of the big win game. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

If the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it may be determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. . In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and that control to the variable probability state is made, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be notified in a recognizable manner that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are varied again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is decided to execute the re-lottery performance, the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery performance.

After determining the final stop pattern and the like in step AKS011, it is determined whether or not there is a standby setting for color change effect (step 77AKS41). In step 77AKS41, for example, when the color change standby flag is ON, it may be determined that there is a standby setting for color change effect. If there is a standby setting for the color change effect (step 77AKS41; Yes), a setting for starting execution of the color change effect is made (step 77AKS42). In step 77AKS42, by the control processing similar to step 77AKS06 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. It would be nice if it could be done. The standby setting of the color change effect is a step of the pre-reading notice setting process if it is a period in which the final stop pattern is derived and displayed when it is decided to execute the color change effect based on the occurrence of the start winning. 77AKS05. In this case, the setting for starting the execution of the color change effect is made in step 77AKS42, so that the execution of the color change effect can be started when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. In this way, during the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, such as during the derivation display of the final stop pattern in the variable display of the decorative patterns, the color changes based on the game ball passing through the starting area. When the execution of the effect is determined, the execution of the color change effect is started after the stop display period ends.

Further, in step 77AKS42, by the control processing similar to step 77AKS07 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. The production may be made continuously executable. Therefore, the sound effect using the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not affected even when the color change effect is executed, and is executed in the same effect mode as when the color change effect is not executed. It becomes possible. During the period from the start of the execution of the color change effect to the end of the color change start sound output period after the end of the color change start sound output period until the end of the execution of the color change effect, in the same effect mode as the period in which the color change effect is not executed. It is sufficient if the voice production can be executed.

When there is no standby setting for color change effect (step 77AKS41; No), after setting in step 77AKS42, battle zone effect determination processing (step AKS012) and notice effect determination processing (step AKS013) are executed in order. Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step AKS014). For example, the CPU77AK131 selects one of the plurality of prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and sets it as a usage pattern. In addition, the CPU 77AK131 selects one of prepared effect control patterns (battle zone effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution setting of the battle zone effect by the battle zone effect determination process of step AKS012, and sets it as a use pattern. You may One of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (previous effect control pattern) may be selected and set as a use pattern in correspondence with the execution setting of the previous effect by the previous notice effect determination process of step AKS013. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, the battle zone production control pattern, and the advance notice production control pattern, and one production control corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production A pattern may be set.

When the production control pattern is determined by step AKS014, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the production control provided in the predetermined area of the RAM77AK125 or the built-in memory 77AK136 (production control timer setting unit, etc.) The initial value of the process timer is set (step AKS015). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step AKS016). At this time, for example, by supplying the display control data specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined by step AKS014 to the VDP77AK132, the image display device The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of 5.

After setting the start of variation in step AKS016, in response to the start of the variable display, such as the first suspension display in the first suspension display portion AKB1 and the second suspension display in the second suspension display portion AKB2 etc. are set (step AKS017). For example, when the first special game is executed (started), in the first reservation display part AKB1, the display part (rightmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). , moves (shifts) the first pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" one by one in the right direction. On the other hand, when the second special game is executed (started), in the second reservation display part AKB2, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). , moves (shifts) the second pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" one by one in the left direction. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In accordance with the shifting of the pending display, the storage contents of the pending display data storage unit may also be shifted. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS018), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-12(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS012 of the variable display start setting process as the battle zone effect determination process. In the battle zone effect determination process, "1" is set as the initial value of the suspension number in order to confirm the contents stored in the suspension display data storage unit AKM1 (step 77AKS11). Subsequently, the determination result corresponding to the set reservation number is read (step 77AKS12). In step 77AKS12, data indicating the result of determination at the time of winning, which is stored corresponding to the set reservation number in the reservation display data storage unit AKM1, for example, may be read. At this time, it is determined whether or not there is no determination result that there is no storage of the determination result corresponding to the reservation number (step 77AKS13). If no hold display data corresponding to the set hold number is stored, step 77 AKS13 determines that there is no judgment result. If there is no determination result (step 77AKS13; Yes), the battle zone effect determination process is terminated.

If there is a winning determination result stored in step 77AKS13 (step 77AKS13; No), it is determined whether or not the read winning determination result is "general when losing" (step 77AKS14). At this time, if it is "general when losing" (step 77AKS14; Yes), 1 is added to the set reservation number (step 77AKS15), and the process returns to step 77AKS12. As described above, in the battle zone effect process, after the initial value "1" of the reservation number is set in step 77AKS11, the reservation display data storage unit AKM1 determines that the judgment result at the time of winning is different from "general at the time of loss". The processing from step 77AKS12 to step 77AKS15 is repeated until the data is reached or until the reservation number reaches a value greater than the first reservation storage number or the second reservation storage number.

In step 77AKS14, if the winning determination result is not "general when losing" (step 77AKS14; No), it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is "super reach determination when losing" or "big hit". (step 77AKS16). At this time, if the result of determination at the time of winning is neither "super reach when losing" nor "big hit" (step 77AKS16; No), the battle zone effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of determination at the time of winning is ``confirmation of super reach when losing'' or ``jackpot'' (step 77AKS16; Yes), the presence or absence of the battle zone presentation, that is, whether or not to execute the battle zone presentation is determined. (Step 77AKS17). At step 77 AKS17, one of "no effect" in which the battle zone effect is not executed and "with effect" in which the battle zone effect is executed is determined.

Based on the result of determination in step 77AKS17, it is determined whether or not it is determined "no effect" that does not execute the battle zone effect (step 77AKS18). If it is "no effect" (step 77AKS18; Yes), the battle zone effect determination process is terminated. If it is "with effect" instead of "no effect" (step 77AKS18; No), the setting for starting the battle zone effect is performed (step 77AKS19), and then the battle zone effect determination process is terminated. In step 77 AKS19, the first pending display of the first pending display portion AKB1 or the second pending display of the second pending display portion AKB2 corresponds to the shift timing when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Then, the setting for starting execution of the battle zone effect is performed. The battle zone effect may include, for example, a telop notification effect that notifies the player that the battle zone effect is different from the color change effect by displaying a telop so that the player can recognize it. The telop notification effect may be executable only during the period in which the battle zone effect is executed in parallel with the color change effect, and regardless of whether it is executed in parallel with the color change effect, the battle zone It may be executable during the period during which the effect is executed.

FIG. 10-12(B) shows a determination example AKG02 of the battle zone effect. At step 77AKS17 of the battle zone effect determination process, the presence or absence of the battle zone effect is determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the winning judgment result read at step 77AKS12. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for battle zone effect determination is extracted, and a prepared battle zone effect determination table stored in advance in the ROM 77AK 124 or the like is referred to. As a result, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not the battle zone effect is to be executed. In the determination example AKG02 of the battle zone effect, it is determined to be either “no effect” in which the battle zone effect is not executed or “executed” in which the battle zone effect is executed. For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is "definite super reach when losing", the determination rate of "without effect" is 80%, and the determination rate of "with effect" is 20%. When the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the determination rate of "no effect" is 40%, and the determination rate of "with effect" is 60%. By such setting, when the battle zone performance is executed, the display result of the variable display becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when the battle zone performance is not executed. In addition, when the battle zone effect is executed, the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win is higher than when the battle zone effect is not executed. By the battle zone production, it is possible to suggest that the game state is controlled to a big hit game state at a predetermined rate. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be heightened by the battle zone production, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the battle zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-12(A), the presence or absence of the battle zone effect can be determined in step 77AKS17 regardless of whether or not the color change effect is being executed. Therefore, the battle zone effect can be executed after the execution of the color change effect is started. Also, if it is not "general when losing" at step 77AKS14 of the battle zone effect determination process, the processes after step 77AKS16 are executed to end the battle zone effect determination process. As a result, in the winning determination results stored in the pending display data storage unit AKM1, in the range in which the winning determination result different from the "general at loss" is included before the winning determination result to be read out , Step 77 AKS16 and subsequent steps are not executed, so there is a limit that the battle zone effect is not executed. On the other hand, the condition for restricting the color change effect can be established when a winning judgment result different from "general winning" is included before the current winning judgment result. Therefore, the battle zone effect can be executed with the variable display common to the color change effect as a suggestion target.

FIG. 10-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS013 of the variable display start setting process as the advance notice effect determination process. In the advance notice effect determination process, as the decision of the advance notice during all pattern fluctuations, presence or absence of advance notice during all pattern fluctuations as to whether or not to execute advance notice during all pattern fluctuations, advance notice type in the case of executing advance notice during all pattern fluctuations, is determined (step 77AKS31). The advance notice during all design fluctuations is a notice effect that can be executed during all design fluctuations in which the decoration designs are changed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. A character display notice corresponding to the notice type of "character notice", a step-up notice corresponding to the notice type of "step-up notice", and a story notice corresponding to the notice type of "story notice" may be included. The character display advance notice is effect display such that a effect image showing a specific character is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 . The advance notice of character display includes character type, display number, size, color, pattern, display position, display timing, display period, passage speed, other actions, dialogue, or a combination of all or part of these characters. It may be executed so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is different according to an arbitrary effect mode by displaying the effect image showing . The step-up notice may be a notice effect such as the execution example shown in FIG. 10-4. The story notice may be a notice effect such as the execution example shown in FIG. 10-5. At step 77, AKS31, it is determined to be "no notice" in which the notice during all symbol changes is not executed, or "character notice", "step-up notice", or "story notice" in the case of executing the notice effect. The CPU 77 AK 131 extracts a random number value for determining the advance notice during all-symbol fluctuations, and based on the random value, refers to the advance notice determination table during all-symbol fluctuations according to the variable display content, thereby determining the presence or absence of the notice effect and the notice type. should be determined.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS31, it is determined whether or not "no notice" is determined (step 77AKS32). If any notice type is determined instead of "no notice" (step 77AKS32; No), the notice performance pattern during all symbol changes is determined (step 77AKS33). The all-symbol-fluctuation notice effect pattern is a effect pattern that can specify the execution timing and effect mode of the all-symbol-change notice, and if a plurality of patterns are stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 77 AK 124, etc. good. The CPU 77 AK 131 selects an all-symbol-fluctuation notice effect pattern determination table corresponding to the notice type, extracts a random number value for determining the all-symbol change notice effect pattern, and based on the random value, performs variable display contents. Then, by referring to the selected all-symbols-fluctuation notice performance pattern determination table, the all-symbols-fluctuation notice performance pattern can be determined.

If it is "no notice" at step 77AKS32 (step 77AKS32; Yes), or after determination at step 77AKS33, it is determined whether or not the variable display content is "non-reach" (step 77AKS34). If the variable display content is "non-reach" (step 77AKS34; Yes), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. If the variable display content is other than "non-reach" (step 77AKS34; No), it is determined whether or not the color change effect is being executed (step 77AKS35). If the color change effect is being executed (step 77AKS35; Yes), it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the target change of the color change effect (step 77AKS36). The target variation of the color change effect is a variable display determined to execute the color change effect based on the winning judgment result, and is a target variable that suggests that the color change effect is controlled to a big win game state. display.

If it is not the target change of the color change effect (step 77AKS36; No), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. If the color change effect is not being executed at step 77AKS35 (step 77AKS35; No), or if there is a target change for the color change effect at step 77AKS37 (step 77AKS36; Yes), the advance notice is executed after the reach is established. Whether or not there is a notice after establishment of the reach, and the type of notice in the case of executing the notice after establishment of the reach are determined (step 77AKS37). The advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state is an advance notice effect that can be executed after establishment of the ready-to-win state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. A group display notice corresponding to the notice type of "notice" and a movable body action notice corresponding to the notice type of "movable body action notice" may be included. In the message display color advance notice, an effect display is performed in which the display color of the character image that notifies of the message in which reach establishment is recognizable is changed. The message display color advance notice may be executed so that the degree of expectation for a big win differs according to the display color of the character image. In the group display advance notice, an effect display is performed such that a group of effect images showing a large number of identical or similar characters pass over the screen of the image display device 5 . Group display notice includes character type, display number, size, color, pattern, display position, display timing, display period, passage speed, or a combination of some or all of these, and other effect image groups showing characters. It may be executed so that the reliability of the big hit is different according to an arbitrary effect mode by the display of . As for the advance notice of the motion of the movable body, an effect including the motion of the movable body 32 is executed. The advance notice of the movable body 32 is based on the movement distance, movement speed, number of movements, direction of movement, number of objects to be moved, or a combination of some or all of these, and other arbitrary effects by the movement of the movable body 32. Therefore, it may be executed so that the reliability of the jackpot is different. At step 77, AKS37, it is determined to be "no notice", which does not execute the notice after establishment of reach, or "display color notice", "group display notice", or "movable body movement notice" when the notice effect is executed. The CPU 77AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state, and determines the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the type of notice by referring to the notice determination table after establishment of the ready-to-win state according to the variable display result based on the random value. do it.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS37, it is determined whether or not "no notice" has been determined (step 77AKS38). If it is "no notice" (step 77AKS38; Yes), the notice effect determination process is terminated. If any notice type is determined instead of "no notice" (step 77AKS38; No), the notice effect pattern after establishment of reach is determined (step 77AKS39), and then the notice effect determination processing is terminated. The post-ready-to-win announcement effect pattern is an effect pattern capable of designating the execution timing of the ready-to-win announcement, effect mode, etc., and a plurality of patterns may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 77AK 124 in advance. The CPU 77 AK 131 selects a post-ready notice performance pattern determination table corresponding to the notice type, extracts a random number value for determining the post-reach notice effect pattern determination, and based on the random value, according to the variable display result, etc. By referring to the selected post-ready-to-win announcement effect pattern determination table, the post-ready-to-win announcement effect pattern may be determined.

FIG. 10-14(A) shows a determination example AKG11 of advance notice during all symbol changes. In step 77AKS31 of the notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of notice during all pattern fluctuations and the notice type are determined at a rate corresponding to the contents of the variable display. At this time, when the advance notice during all symbol variations is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher than when it is not executed. Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the step-up notice is executed than when the character display notice is executed. The degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the story notice is executed than when the step-up notice is executed.

FIG. 10-14(B) shows a determination example AKG12 of advance notice after establishment of reach. In step 77AKS37 of the notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of the notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state and the type of notice are determined at a rate corresponding to the result of the variable display. At this time, when the advance notice is executed after the ready-to-win is established, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when it is not executed. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the group display notice is executed than when the message display color notice is executed. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the movable body operation notice is executed than when the group display notice is executed.

In the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, step 77AKS37 is executed when it is determined in step 77AKS35 that the color change effect is being executed and in step 77AKS36 it is determined that the target is not changed. Since it is not executed, it is not decided to execute the notice after the reach is established. There is a limit that the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state is not executed in the range until the target changes while the color change effect is being executed. As a result, the execution of the post-reach notice is restricted during the period until the target changes after the execution of the color change effect is started. In the variable display in which the determination result at the time of winning is "general at the time of loss", the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the normal-to-win ready-to-win effect may be executed. Even in this case, when it is determined at step 77AKS35 that the color change effect is being executed and at step 77AKS36 it is determined that the target is not fluctuating, it is not decided to execute the advance notice after establishment of reach. Therefore, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win state is established during execution of the color change effect, it is possible to limit the execution of the advance notice after the ready-to-win state is established. Since the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state is executed after establishment of the ready-to-win state in which the variable display of the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the effect of increasing the expectation of the player may be increased. During the execution of the color change effect, if the advance notice after establishment of the reach is executed before the target changes, the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", disappointing the player and disappointing the player against the color change effect. may also reduce the reliability of In addition, if the color change effect and the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state are executed at the same time, the player may have a complicated impression. Therefore, during the execution of the color change effect, the execution of the advance notice after the ready-to-win is established in response to the variable display before the target is changed is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the loss of the player's confidence in the color change effect and to prevent the player from having a complicated impression.

FIG. 10-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 9 as the effect process during variable display. In this variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step AKS031). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be determined that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step AKS032). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (preview effect control pattern) determined in step AKS014 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is the notice effect period (step AKS032; Yes), control to execute the notice effect is performed (step AKS033).

If it is not the announcement effect period (step AKS032; No), or after the control of step AKS033, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the battle zone effect (step 77AKS51). When it is decided at step 77AKS17 of the battle zone effect determination process that the battle zone effect is to be executed, it is determined at step 77AKS51 that it is time to start the battle zone effect as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. be done. In addition, it is not limited to the timing at which the variable display of decorative patterns is started. For example, at any timing during execution of the variable display of decorative patterns, such as a specific timing during all pattern fluctuations, it is the start timing of the battle zone production. may be determined. When it is time to start the battle zone effect (step 77AKS51; Yes), control is performed to start execution of the battle zone effect (step 77AKS52). In step 77AKS52, control processing is performed when the execution of the battle zone effect is started by the drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. When executing the battle zone effect, for example, the display of the background image is changed from the normal background image to the background image corresponding to the battle zone. Also, in the battle zone production, for example, a specific character image may be displayed in a silhouette mode. At step 77AKS52, the CPU 77AK131 performs a voice control process for starting execution of the battle zone presentation by a voice command supplied to the voice processing circuit 77AK133. When the battle zone effect is executed, the sound effect using the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed from the normal sound effect to the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone.

When it is not the timing to start the battle zone effect (step 77AKS51; No), after the control of step 77AKS52, it is determined whether or not the color change effect is being executed (step 78AKS01). If the color change effect is being performed (step 78AKS01; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing after establishment of a predetermined reach corresponding to the end of the color change effect (step 78AKS02). The color change production is the production control pattern so that the end timing after the establishment of the ready-to-win is reached after the establishment of the ready-to-win where the variable display of the decorative pattern in the target fluctuation becomes the ready-to-win mode, for example, before the timing at which the notice can be executed after the establishment of the ready-to-win. etc. should be set. If it is the end timing after establishment of the reach (step 78AKS02; Yes), control is performed to end execution of the color change effect (step 78AKS03). In step 78AKS03, control processing is performed when the execution of the color change effect is terminated by the drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. When the color change effect is terminated, the color in the effect display is returned to the normal color by returning to the drawing process in the case where the normal color is not changed. When the execution of the color change effect ends, an effect image for notifying the end of the color change effect may be displayed in a predetermined color change effect end notification period. The control in step 78AKS03 may include control for displaying on the screen of the image display device 5 an effect image notifying the end of the color change effect by means of a drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132.

If it is not during the color change effect (step 78AKS01; No), if it is not the end timing after establishment of the ready-to-win (step 78AKS02; No), or after the control in step 78AKS03, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period. (step AKS035). Reach effect period, for example in step AKS014 of the variable display start setting process determined in accordance with the variation pattern in the effect control pattern (special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern, etc.), it may be determined in advance. When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step AKS035; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step AKS036). If it is not a reach production period (step AKS035; No), after the control by step AKS036, for example, based on the setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other variable display operation of the decorative pattern (step AKS037), the effect processing during variable display is terminated. In addition, during the variable display of decorative patterns in which the color change effect is not executed, it is suggested which of the color change effect to be executed, the monochrome change or the gold color change, based on the occurrence of the start winning. It may be possible to execute the color change suggesting effect to be performed at a predetermined rate. After the color change suggesting effect is executed, there may be a case where the suggested color change effect is started and a case where the suggested color change effect is not started. When the color change suggesting effect is executed, the execution of the color change suggesting effect may be started at a higher rate than when the color change suggesting effect is not executed. By executing such a color change suggesting effect, it is possible to increase the expectation and the degree of attention to the color change effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step AKS031 (step AKS031; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS038). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step AKS038; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the design confirmation command is received (step AKS038; Yes), for example, by supplying a drawing command corresponding to the design confirmation from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132, the final display result in the variable display of the decorative design Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (determined decoration symbol) as a stop display (step AKS039).

Following the control by step AKS039, it is determined whether or not the battle zone effect is being executed (step 78AKS11). When the battle zone effect is being performed (step 78AKS11; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display of this time is a variable display for the target change of the battle zone effect (step 78AKS12). The target variation of the battle zone production is a variable display corresponding to the judgment result at the time of winning that it is decided to execute the battle zone production, and is a target variable that suggests that the battle zone production is controlled to the jackpot game state. display. In the case of the target change of the battle zone effect (step 78AKS12; Yes), control is performed to terminate the execution of the battle zone effect (step 78AKS13). In step 78AKS13, control processing for ending execution of the battle zone effect is performed by the drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. By step 78AKS13, the execution of the battle zone effect can be ended in response to the end of the variable display in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed.

If it is not during the battle zone production (step 78AKS11; No), if it is not the target change of the battle zone production (step 78AKS12; No), or after the control by step 78AKS13, a jackpot start designation command reception waiting time is set in advance. A defined fixed time is set (step AKS040). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step AKS041), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIGS. 10-16 show an effect execution example when the battle zone effect is started. In the battle zone effect, regardless of whether the color change effect is executed or not, the decoration pattern is displayed in a variable manner based on the determination result of step 77AKS17 of the battle zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-12(A). is started, it becomes executable. FIGS. 10-16 (A1) to (C1) show the case of no color change effect in which the color change effect is not executed. FIGS. 10-16 (A2) to (C2), (D2), and (E2) show the case where the monochrome change is executed among the color change effects. FIGS. 10-16 (A3) to (C3) show a case where a golden color change is executed among the color change effects.

In the case of no color change effect, from the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed like the effect execution example 77AK201 shown in FIG. Execution of the battle zone effect is started along with the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern. When it is determined at step 77AKS51 shown in FIGS. 10-15 that it is time to start the battle zone effect, the control at step 77AKS52 makes it possible to start execution of the battle zone effect. In effect execution example 77AK202, the background image is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the battle zone. Also, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed in a silhouette mode. When there is no color change effect, the effect image of the character CH1 displayed in a silhouette mode includes, for example, a contour partial image showing the contour of the character CH1 and an internal specific image having a specific color inside the contour. I wish I could. For the internal partial image, a specific color, such as rainbow color, may be set as the normal color. Furthermore, a character image is displayed to inform the user of a message such as "entering the battle zone". When there is no color change effect, the text image for notifying the message may have a normal color such as blue. After that, in effect execution example 77AK203 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C1), while the display of the character image for notifying the message is erased, a telop display is started that makes it recognizable that the battle zone effect is being executed. ing.

When execution of the battle zone effect is started as in effect execution example 77AK202 shown in FIG. The voice effect using is changed from the normal voice effect to the voice effect corresponding to the battle zone. For example, in the normal voice presentation, music phrases PH01 to PH03 are repeatedly reproduced and output. In the voice effect corresponding to the battle zone, when the execution of the battle zone effect such as effect execution example 77AK202 is started, the player can recognize the start of execution of the battle zone effect by reproducing and outputting the music phrase PHA1. should be notified to After that, when the execution of the battle zone effect progresses as in effect execution example 77AK203 shown in FIG. It is only necessary to make it possible to execute voice effects in a mode different from the voice effects by the phrases PH01 to PH03.

When the monochrome change is being executed, from the state in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed like the production execution example 77AK211 shown in FIG. 10-16 (A2), the production execution example 77AK212 shown in FIG. 10-16 (B2) Execution of the battle zone effect is started along with the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern. During execution of the monochrome change, the screen display of the image display device 5 is changed so that a plurality of effect displays, such as a background image, a decorative design, and a part of the preview effect, are displayed in a common grayscale display color. The color has changed to a color different from the normal color. At this time, when the timing for starting the battle zone effect comes, the execution of the battle zone effect can be started, and the background image is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the battle zone. Also, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed in a silhouette mode. When the monochrome change is being executed, the performance image of the character CH1 displayed in the silhouette mode is displayed in a grayscale display color as a whole, for example, so that it changes to a color different from the normal color. The display of a character image that notifies a message such as "entering the battle zone" also changes to a color different from the normal color, for example, by displaying the entire display in a grayscale display color. In this way, when both the monochrome change in the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed, the period during which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed and the period during which the battle zone effect is executed may overlap.

When the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the monochrome change as in the effect execution example 77AK212 shown in FIG. By the control of step 77 AKS52, the sound effect using the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed from the normal sound effect to the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone. At this time, even during execution of the monochrome change, by reproducing and outputting the music phrase PHA1 as in the case where the monochrome change is not executed, the start of execution of the battle zone effect is notified in a way that the player can recognize. Just do it.

Following the effect execution example 77AK212, in the effect execution example 77AK213 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C2), while the display of the character image informing the message is erased, it is possible to recognize that the battle zone effect is being executed. A telop display has started. When the monochrome change is being executed, the telop display may notify a message that allows the user to recognize that the monochrome change is being executed together with the battle zone effect. It suffices if, by means of a telop display for notifying such a message, it is possible to execute a parallel notification effect for notifying that the monochrome change in the color change effect is being executed in parallel with the battle zone effect. The parallel notification effect may be performed as an audio effect using sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R in place of or in addition to the telop display. In addition, the parallel notification effect may be executed using any effect device. When the execution of the battle zone effect progresses during the execution of the monochrome change as in the effect execution example 77AK213, the music phrase PHA2 is reproduced and output in the same manner as in the effect execution example 77AK203 when the monochrome change is not executed. It is only necessary to make it possible to execute the voice effect in a different effect mode from the voice effect by the music phrases PH01 to PH03 in the normal time when the battle zone effect is not executed. During the period when the color change effect is being executed, since the voice effect can be executed in the same effect mode as when the color change effect is not being executed, the monochrome change is not executed even during the execution of the monochrome change. In an effect mode common to the case, an audio effect for reproducing and outputting the songs PHA1 and PHA2 corresponding to the battle zone is executed.

In step 77AKS31 of the notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-13, it is decided to execute the notice during all symbol changes at a predetermined rate even during the execution of the battle mode effect and the color change effect. In one example, it is determined to execute a step-up notice as a notice during all symbol fluctuations. In the effect execution example 77AK214 shown in FIG. 10-16 (D2), the step-up notice is executed during execution of the battle mode effect and the color change effect. In this case, the effect display in the step-up notice changes its color by executing the color change effect, and the whole is displayed in a grayscale display color, for example. In another example, it is decided to execute a story announcement as an announcement during all symbol changes. In the effect execution example 77AK215 shown in FIG. 10-16 (E2), the story announcement is executed during the execution of the battle mode effect and the color change effect. The effect display in the story notice uses a larger image than the effect display in the step-up notice. The effect image used in the story announcement may have a size that can be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, for example. The effect display in the story preview is displayed in the same color as the normal color without changing the color due to the execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect. In this way, during the period in which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the step-up notice can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color, while the effect display in the story notice can be changed in color. It can be executed with a color common to the period when the production is not executed.

When the gold color change is being executed, from the state in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed like the production execution example 77AK221 shown in FIG. 10-16 (A3), the production execution example shown in FIG. 10-16 (B3) Along with the start of the variable display of decorative symbols like 77AK222, the execution of the battle zone effect is started. The screen display of the image display device 5 is changed so that a plurality of effect displays such as a background image, a decorative pattern, a notice effect, and an interface display are displayed in a common gold color during execution of the gold color change. The color at the time has changed to a color different from the color at normal time. At this time, when the timing for starting the battle zone effect comes, the execution of the battle zone effect can be started, and the background image is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the battle zone. Also, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed in a silhouette mode. When the golden display is being executed, the effect image of the character CH1 displayed in the silhouette mode changes to a color different from the normal color, for example, by displaying the whole in a golden display color. . The display of the character image that notifies the message "entering the battle zone" is also changed to a color different from the normal color, for example, by displaying the entire display in a gold-based display color. In this way, when both the golden color change in the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed, the period during which the gold color change in the color change effect is executed and the period during which the battle zone effect is executed may overlap.

Even when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the golden color change as in the effect execution example 77AK222 shown in FIG. 2, the sound effect using the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed from the normal sound effect to the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone. At this time, even during execution of the gold-tone change, the player can recognize the start of execution of the battle zone effect by reproducing and outputting the music phrase PHA1 in the same manner as when the gold-tone change is not executed. should be notified.

Following the effect execution example 77AK222, in the effect execution example 77AK223 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C3), while the display of the character image informing the message is erased, it is possible to recognize that the battle zone effect is being executed. A telop display has started. When the golden color change is being executed, the telop display may notify a recognizable message that the gold color change is being executed together with the battle zone effect. With the telop display for notifying such a message, it is possible to execute a parallel notification effect for notifying that the golden color change in the color change effect is being executed in parallel with the battle zone effect. The parallel notification effect may be performed as an audio effect using sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R in place of or in addition to the telop display. In addition, the parallel notification effect may be executed using any effect device. When the execution of the battle zone effect progresses during the execution of the gold color change as in the effect execution example 77AK223, the battle zone effect is executed by reproducing and outputting the music phrase PHA2 as in the effect execution examples 77AK203 and 77AK213. It is only necessary to make it possible to execute voice effects in a mode different from the voice effects of the music phrases PH01 to PH03 in the normal time when the music phrases PH01 to PH03 are not used. During the period when the color change effect is being executed, the sound effect can be executed in the same effect mode as when the color change effect is not being executed, so even during the execution of the gold change effect, the gold change effect can be executed. In the same effect mode as when not playing, the voice effect of reproducing and outputting the songs PHA1 and PHA2 corresponding to the battle zone is executed.

When a step-up notice is executed as a notice during all pattern changes during execution of a golden change in the color change production, the production display in the step-up notice changes the color due to the execution of the color change production, for example, the whole Displayed in a gold color. When a story notice is executed as a notice during all pattern changes during the execution of the gold color change in the color change production, the production display in the story notice changes the color due to the execution of the color change production, for example, the whole is gold. is displayed in the display color of . The effect display in the story notice uses a larger image than the effect display in the step-up notice. In this way, during the period in which the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the step-up notice can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color, and the effect display in the story notice can be changed in color. It can be done with colors that change according to the presentation and the corresponding colors. Note that the effect display in the story preview may be displayed in the same color as the normal color without changing the color due to the execution of the golden color change in the color change effect. In this case, during the period in which the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the step-up notice can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color, while the effect in the story notice The display can be executed in the same color as during the period when the color change effect is not executed.

The effect display in the step-up notice effect is changed according to the color change effect during the period in which the color change effect is executed, regardless of which of the monochrome change and the golden color change in the color change effect is executed. It can be done with colors and corresponding colors. The effect display in the story notice effect can be executed in the same color as the period in which the color change effect is not executed during the period when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, out of the monochrome change and the golden change in the color change effect. On the other hand, during the period in which the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, it can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color. In this way, the plurality of advance notice effects are the first notice effect that can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color during the period in which the color change effect is executed, regardless of the color changed by the color change effect. A second advance notice effect that can be executed with a different color during a period in which the color change effect is executed according to the effect and the color changed by the color change effect may be included. Depending on the color to be changed by the color change effect, the second notice effect can be executed with the same color as the period when the color change effect is not executed in the period when the color change effect is executed, and in the color change effect. It is sufficient to have correspondingly changed colors and cases where the corresponding colors are feasible.

FIG. 10-17 shows an example of control of the timing of starting and ending execution of the color change effect and the battle zone effect. Execution of the color change effect can be started at the timing when the game medium passes through the start area provided in the first start prize winning port or the second start prize winning port as the occurrence of the start prize winning. After that, in the variable display as the target variation of the color change performance, the execution of the color change performance is completed at the timing provided after the ready-to-win state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. Execution of the battle zone effect can be started at the start timing of the battle zone effect accompanying the start of the variable display based on the winning determination result included in the reserved display data. After that, in the variable display which becomes the target variation of the battle zone production, the execution of the battle zone production ends at the timing when the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the final stop pattern is derived and displayed by the stop display.

FIG. 10-17(A) shows a control example 78AKC01 of the timing of starting and ending execution of the color change effect. In the control example 78AKC01, execution of the color change effect based on the passage of the game ball through the starting area is started at the timing T01 when the starting prize is generated. After that, through a shift timing associated with the start of variable display different from the target variation, the variable display as the target variation is started, and the execution of the color change performance is finished at the timing T02 provided after the ready-to-win establishment. In the notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-13, it is possible to decide to execute the notice after the ready-to-win state is established in step 77AKS37 in the case of the target variation of the color change effect. Thus, when it is determined to execute the notice after establishment of the reach, the notice after establishment of the reach can be executed in the period after the timing T02. In this way, by executing the color change effect during the period from timing T01 to timing T02, it is possible to change a plurality of effect displays to colors different from normal. It should be noted that, for example, at any timing included in the period from timing T01 to timing T02, such as the shift timing associated with the start of variable display different from the target variation and the timing at which the variable display that becomes the target variation is started, the color change effect can be performed. is temporarily terminated, and after a predetermined waiting period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, effect control may be performed such that the color change effect is restored.

FIG. 10-17(B) shows a control example 78AKC02 of the timing of starting and ending execution of the battle zone effect. In control example 78AKC02, at timing T11, which is the shift timing associated with the start of a new variable display, after the start winning has occurred, the execution of the battle zone effect based on the determination result at the time of winning included in the pending display data is started. . After that, the variable display as the target variation is started, and after the ready-to-win establishment and the notice after the ready-to-win establishment are executed, the execution of the battle zone effect is finished at the timing T12 of the end of the target fluctuation by the derivation display of the final stop symbol. In the notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-13, regardless of whether or not the battle zone effect is being executed, it is possible to decide to execute the notice after the ready-to-win state is established in step 77AKS37. Thus, in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T12, by executing the battle zone effect, it is possible to suggest that the game state is controlled to the big win game state at a predetermined rate.

After starting execution of the color change effect at timing T01 in control example 78AKC01 and before ending execution of the color change effect at timing T02, execution of the battle zone effect is started at timing T11 in control example 78AKC02. be. After starting execution of the battle zone effect at timing T11 in control example 78AKC02 and before ending execution of the battle zone effect at timing T12, execution of the color change effect ends at timing T02 in control example 78AKC01. . Therefore, during the period from timing T11 to timing T02, both the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed, and the periods during which the respective effects are executed overlap. During the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02, the battle zone effect is executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color. For example, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the battle zone effect is executed in a grayscale display color in the period from timing T11 to timing T02, thereby changing according to the monochrome change. A battle zone effect is executed with colors and colors in a monochrome mode corresponding to the colors. Further, when the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, during the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02, by executing the effect display in the battle zone effect in a golden display color, A battle zone effect is executed with the changed color and the corresponding golden color.

During the period from timing T02 to timing T12, the battle zone effect is executed with the normal color in response to the termination of the color change effect. For example, in the period from timing T02 to timing T12 after the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the battle zone effect is returned from the monochrome mode color to the normal mode color and executed. After the production is finished, the battle zone production can be executed with normal colors. In addition, after the gold color change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the battle zone effect is returned from the golden color to the normal color during the period from timing T02 to timing T12. After the color change effect is completed, the battle zone effect can be executed with the normal color. In this way, the battle zone effect can be finished at a timing later than the color change effect, and after the color change effect is finished, the battle zone effect can be executed in normal colors.

FIGS. 10-18 show examples of execution of effects corresponding to variable displays that are target variations of color change effects and battle zone effects. In the effect execution example 78AK101 shown in FIG. 10-18(A1), when the color change effect is not executed and the color change effect is not executed, the variable display that becomes the target change of the battle zone effect is started. In the effect execution example 78AK102 shown in FIG. 10-18(A2), when the monochrome change in the color change effect is being executed, the variable display that becomes the target change of the battle zone effect is started. In the effect execution example 78AK103 shown in FIG. 10-18 (A3), when the golden color change in the color change effect is being executed, the variable display that becomes the target change of the battle zone effect is started.

After that, in the effect execution example 78AK111 shown in FIG. 10-18(B), the execution of the color change effect is completed at the timing T02 provided after the ready-to-win is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. . More specifically, as in effect execution example 78AK102, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, at timing T02 after that, the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-15 is executed. At step 78AKS02, it is determined that it is the end timing after reaching establishment. By the control of step 78AKS03 based on this determination result, the execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect is terminated, and the effect display on the screen of the image display device 5 including the effect display in the battle zone effect is changed to the normal color. bring back. Further, as in the effect execution example 78AK103, when the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, step 78AKS02 of the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. , it is determined that it is the end timing after reaching establishment. By the control of step 78AKS03 based on this determination result, the execution of the golden color change in the color change effect is terminated, and the effect display on the screen of the image display device 5 including the effect display in the battle zone effect is changed to the normal color. return to In addition, in the effect execution example 78AK111, by displaying an effect image informing a message of "reach!"

At step 78AKS03 of the effect processing during variable display, effect control may be performed in accordance with the end of the color change effect so that a effect image notifying the end of the color change effect is displayed. As in effect execution example 78AK102, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, an effect image may be displayed to notify the message "Monochrome time is over!". The effect image that indicates the end of the monochrome change in the color change effect may be displayed in a grayscale display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the grayscale display color. As in the effect execution example 78AK103, when the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, an effect image notifying the message "Gold time is over!" may be displayed. The effect image for notifying the end of the golden color change in the color change effect may be displayed in a gold color, or may be displayed in a color different from the gold color. The effect image notifying the end of the color change effect may be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . With such a display, when the color change effect ends, the scene in which the display color is changed is concealed, and discomfort caused by the change in the display color can be suppressed.

In the effect execution example 78AK112 shown in FIG. 10-18(C), the group display notice is executed in the notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state. Since the execution of the color change effect is completed when the advance notice such as the group display notice is executed after establishment of the ready-to-win state, regardless of the color changed according to the color change effect, the effect display is displayed according to the notice after establishment of the ready-to-reach effect. can be colored. In the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, if it is determined in step 77AKS35 that the color change effect is being performed and if it is determined in step 77AKS36 that the target is not fluctuating, step 77AKS37 is not executed. It is not decided to execute the notice after the reach is established. Therefore, when the color change effect is being executed, by restricting the execution of the notice after the establishment of the ready-to-win until the variable display that becomes the target variation is executed, it is possible to prevent the color of the effect display in the notice after the establishment of the reach from changing. can be prevented.

In the effect execution example 78AK113 shown in FIG. 10-18(D), the effect display is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win after the establishment of ready-to-win. At this time, the battle zone effect is continuously executed, and the display of the background image and the telop display correspond to the battle zone effect. Further, by executing the ready-to-win effect using the effect image showing the character CH1, the effect display related to the battle zone effect may be executable. After that, in the effect execution example 78AK114 shown in FIG. 10-18(E), the determined decoration pattern of the big hit combination is derived and displayed as the final stop pattern, and the execution of the battle zone effect ends at the timing T12 of the end of the target variation. there is In this way, the battle zone effect and the color change effect can be executed with the same variable display as the target change, while the battle zone effect can be finished at a timing later than the color change effect, and the color change effect can be executed. After the end, the battle zone production can be executed in normal colors. In addition, when the same variable display is executed as the target variation for the battle zone production and the color change production, in the variable display that becomes the target change, the production mode is different from when the color change production is not executed. reach production may be executed. Such a ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win may be a special effect display when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during execution of the monochrome change or golden color change in the color change effect.

10-19 show configuration examples of effect displays including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn, for example, divided into a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-19, layers AKL0 to AKL4 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Of these layers, the layer AKL0 is a display layer with the highest display priority, and draws a rendering image that becomes a gold effect when a gold color change in the color change rendering is executed so that it can be displayed. The layer AKL1 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer AKL0, and is a variable display including a small pattern display area AKA1 as a first interface display area and a variable display compatible display area AKA2 as a second interface display area. A related effect image or the like is drawn so that it can be displayed. The layer AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer AKL1, and is drawn so as to be able to display the effect images of the preview effect included in the full-screen preview effect, such as the story preview among the previews during all pattern fluctuations. . The layer AKL3 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer AKL2. A performance image of a general notice performance not included in the full-screen notice performance, such as a step-up notice among the notices during pattern fluctuation, is drawn so as to be displayable. The layer AKL4 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image as a background image so that it can be displayed.

A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by display priority information or the like included in the display list, for example. In the display list, the effect image placed on layer AKL4 is designated as the first drawing target, and thereafter, the effect images placed on each display layer are designated as drawing targets in the order of layers AKL3, AKL2, AKL1, and AKL0. good too. Also, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on the layers AKL0 to AKL4 may be set with a Z value, which is the depth value used when superimposing and drawing the respective effect images. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the layers AKL0 to AKL4 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value is arranged on the nearer side (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, and the display priority of the image is higher. You should do it like this.

Note that, for example, the effect image for the gold color effect drawn on the layer AKL0 becomes a drawing target when the gold color change in the color change effect is executed, while the gold color display in the color change effect is executed. If there is none, it will not be drawn. Further, for example, the effect image of the notice effect drawn on the layer AKL2 is a target for drawing when the full screen notice effect such as the story notice among the notices during all pattern changes is being executed. is not executed, it will not be drawn. A layer may be provided on which the effect image is not drawn, depending on whether or not the effect image is to be drawn. Alternatively, layers on which effect images are not drawn may be excluded from the control targets depending on whether they are to be drawn. For example, the effect image showing the decoration pattern and the effect image of the preview effect drawn on the layer AKL3 may actually be effect images drawn on different layers according to their respective display priorities. , are drawn on the same layer AKL3 in order to explain the image processing associated with the execution of the color change effect.

When the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the small pattern display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area are also colored differently from the normal colors. The display color changes to a different golden color. Therefore, the layer AKL0, which draws the effect image for the gold effect, is set to have a higher display priority than the layer AKL1, which draws the effect image related to the variable display. On the other hand, the layer AKL1 that draws the effect image related to the variable display may be set to have a higher display priority than the layer AKL0 that draws the effect image for the gold effect. The display priority may be differentiated between the small pattern display area AKA1, which is the first interface display area, and the variable display-compatible display area AKA2, which is the second interface display area. For example, the layer that draws the effect image of the small pattern display area AKA1, which is the first interface display area, is set to have the highest display priority, and the layer that draws the effect image of the variable display compatible display area AKA2, which is the second interface display area. A layer for drawing an image may be set as the layer AKL1 so that the display priority thereof is lower than that of the layer AKL0 for drawing the effect image for the gold effect. In addition, the display priority according to the layer for drawing various effect images can be arbitrarily set based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

When the VDP 77AK132 writes the image data read out from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 77AK145 or the like, the VDP 77AK132 may determine the display priority by comparing the Z values. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image with a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image with a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the small value as the Z value has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the large value as the Z value. It can be arranged on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It can be arranged on the back side (rear side) as seen. Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be a reverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower Z value than a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high. In this manner, rendering processing of effect images corresponding to a plurality of display layers is executed to generate a display image AKX1 including effect images corresponding to a plurality of effect displays. The display image AKX1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after superimposing the images drawn on the layers AKL0 to AKL5 as a plurality of display layers with different display priorities.

When a monochrome change is executed in the color change effect, the effect images drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are converted into grayscale display colors, thereby being changed to colors different from normal colors. In this way, the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are included in the monochrome change target for changing the color of the effect image designated as the drawing object to a color different from the normal color when the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect. When a gold color change is executed in the color change effect, the effect image to be drawn on the layers AKL1 to AKL4 is changed to a color different from the normal color by converting the display color of the gold color. In this way, the layers AKL1 to AKL4 are included in the gold-tone change object that changes the color of the effect image designated as the drawing object to a color different from the normal color when executing the gold-tone change in the color change effect. be

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing an example of color change synthesis processing executed by the VDP77AK132. Color change synthesis processing is executed when a display list including drawing commands for color blending as a color overlay is transferred based on the result of decoding the instruction code by the instruction decoder of the VDP77AK132, for example. Color overlay is an image processing function that the drawing circuit 77AK144 of the VDP77AK132 has, for example, and by applying a conversion formula prepared in advance to the target image data, an image with new colors can be formed.

When the color change synthesizing process is started, the image data to be converted is read (step 79AKS01). The conversion target image data is image data whose color is to be converted by color blending as a color overlay in order to execute the color change effect. For example, in the VDP 77AK132, image data to be converted is read out from the performance data memory 77AK123 or the like, and stored in the work area of the VRAM 77AK145 or the like for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit 77AK141 of the VDP 77AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 77AK123 and the buffer area of the external RAM 77AK125 or VRAM 77AK145 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command. The data may be transferred to an area or the like and stored. Image data to be converted is specified by a drawing command as image data representing an effect image to be drawn on one of the layers AKL1 to AKL4 among the plurality of display layers.

After step 79AKS01, the image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the low-priority display layer (step 79AKS02). At this time, among the image data stored in the work area in step 79AKS01, the image data representing the effect images drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are stored in the frame buffer of the VRAM 77AK145. For example, the VDP 77AK132 first causes the graphics decoder 77AK143 and the drawing circuit 77AK144 to store in the frame buffer image data representing an effect image to be drawn on the layer AKL4 specified by the drawing command. As a result, the effect image is drawn on the layer AKL4. Next, the VDP 77AK 132 causes the graphics decoder 77AK 143 and the drawing circuit 77AK 144 to store the image data representing the effect image to be drawn on the layer AKL3 specified by the drawing command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. . At this time, inter-pixel arithmetic processing may be executed in accordance with the drawing command. In this way, the effect image on layer AKL3 is rendered superimposably combined with the effect image on layer AKL4. Up to this point, the effect images of the respective layers AKL3 and AKL4 are rendered in full color, which is the normal color.

Following step 79AKS02, color blend image processing, which is monochrome conversion, is executed (step 79AKS03). In step 79AKS03, the respective values of the R component, the G component, and the B component of each pixel of the effect image in the layers AKL3 and AKL4 drawn in step 79AKS02 are converted using a conversion formula for changing to a grayscale display color. be done. As a result, the effect images drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 change to a grayscale color different from the normal color.

After step 79AKS03, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the display layer of high priority (step 79AKS04). At this time, among the image data stored in the work area in step 79AKS01, the image data representing the effect images drawn on the layers AKL1 and AKL2 are stored in the frame buffer of the VRAM 77AK145. For example, the VDP77AK132 stores image data representing an effect image to be drawn on the layer AKL2 specified by the drawing command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. Note that layer AKL2 draws an effect image such as a story notice included in the full screen notice effect. Data need not be stored in the frame buffer. Also, the VDP 77AK 132 stores the image data representing the effect image to be drawn on the layer AKL1 specified by the drawing command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. At this time, inter-pixel arithmetic processing may be executed in accordance with the drawing command. In this way, the effect images on the layers AKL1 and AKL2 are rendered superimposably combined with the effect images on the layers AKL3 and AKL4. At this time, the effect images of the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are rendered in grayscale colors, whereas the effect images of the layers AKL1 and AKL2 are rendered in full color which is the normal color.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a drawing command for gold conversion is received (step 79AKS05). At this time, if there is no drawing command for gold color conversion (step 79AKS05; No), the color change synthesis process is terminated. On the other hand, when the drawing command for gold conversion is received (step 79AKS05; Yes), color blend image processing for gold conversion is executed (step 79AKS06). At step 79AKS06, the values of the R component, G component, and B component of each pixel of the effect image drawn in the frame buffer are converted using a conversion formula for changing the display color to gold. At this time, each pixel of the effect image drawn on the layers AKL1 and AKL2 may be changed to a grayscale color as in step 79AKS03, and then changed to a golden color. If the effect image to be changed to a golden color is directly changed from the normal color to the golden color, for example, if the color is uneven in the normal color, the golden color will be unnatural. As a result, there is a risk of giving the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, the effect image to be changed to a golden color is first changed from the normal color to a grayscale color, and then changed to a golden color. As a result, for example, even if there is a bias in color tone in the normal color, the gold color becomes natural, and the sense of incongruity given to the player can be suppressed.

When the image processing in step 79AKS06 is executed, for example, the image processing in step 79AKS03 changes the image data to be displayed from normal colors to display colors using grayscale colors. to reduce the number of colors in the image data. A rendered image of a display color using grayscale colors is a multi-gradation single-color image represented by a single color with different lightness depending on the pixel position. After that, in the image processing in step 79AKS06, image processing corresponding to display colors using gold colors is applied by executing color blend image processing using a conversion formula corresponding to color overlay. As a result, the effect images corresponding to the plurality of effect displays drawn on the layers AKL1 to AKL4 are changed to a common color such as a display color using gold colors.

When the image processing in step 79AKS06 is performed, the effect for gold is applied (step 79AKS07), and then the color change synthesis process is terminated. At step 79AKS07, among the image data stored in the work area at step 79AKS01, the image data representing the effect image drawn on layer AKL0 is stored in the frame buffer of VRAM 77AK145. For example, the VDP77AK132 stores image data representing an effect image to be rendered on the layer AKL0 specified by the rendering command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. Layer AKL0 draws an effect image that is an effect for gold, and this effect image may have a color corresponding to the display color of gold in the normal state. By executing the image processing for applying the gold effect in step 79AKS07, the player can easily recognize the display color using the gold color, and the player's impression of the gold color change in the color change effect is enhanced. be able to.

In this way, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the normal color is changed to the grayscale color for the effect image drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 by the color overlay. done. When the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the effect image drawn on the layers AKL1 to AKL4 is changed from the normal color to the grayscale color by the color overlay, and then the grayscale color is changed. A process is performed to change the color of the image to a golden color. In the color change synthesizing process, the common color change process of steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05 can be executed when the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect and when the golden color change is executed in the color change effect. In this way, by being able to execute the common color change process, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while reducing the processing load of changing the color of the effect display.

In the configuration example shown in FIGS. 10-19, a rendering image that is an effect for gold is drawn on the layer AKL0. In step 79AKS07 of the color change synthesizing process, the effect image is drawn on layer AKL0, which has a higher display priority than layers AKL1 to AKL4 to which image processing corresponding to display colors using gold colors is applied. Effect display by the effect for gold can be given priority over the effect display changed to gold color. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the golden color change in the color change effect and improve the interest of the color change effect.

As described above, in the characterizing portions 77AK to 79AK, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, such as the period from the timing T01 to the timing T02 of the control example 78AKC01 shown in FIG. A period from the timing when the game ball passes through the starting area provided in the mouth to the timing provided after the ready-to-win state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode after the variable display to change the target is started. , it is possible to execute a color change effect that changes the colors of a plurality of effect displays displayed during that period.

The battle zone effect suggesting control to the jackpot gaming state included in the advantageous state is the period from timing T11 to timing T12 of the control example 78AKC02 shown in FIG. 10-17(B). It can be executed in a period at least partially different from the period in which the effect is executed. When both the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed, the period from timing T11 to timing T02 of the control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02 shown in FIGS. 10-17(A) and 10-17(B). In addition, the period during which the color change effect is executed may overlap with the period during which the battle zone effect is executed. In the period during which the battle zone effect is executed without overlapping with the period during which the color change effect is executed, such as the period from timing T02 to timing T12 in control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02, FIGS. 10-16 (C1) shown in production execution examples 77AK202, 77AK203 and production execution examples 78AK111 to 78AK113 shown in FIGS. Run. In the period during which the color change effect is executed and the battle zone effect is executed, such as the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02 in the control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02, FIGS. 10-16 (B2) and 10-16 Effect execution examples 77AK212 and 77AK213 shown in (C2), and effect execution examples 77AK222 and 77AK223 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B3) and 10-16 (C3). It is executed by the special color corresponding to the color changed according to the production.

When such a color change effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is a normal color corresponding to no color change effect or a special color corresponding to a monochrome change or a gold change in the color change effect, For example, part of the battle zone production, such as voice production corresponding to the battle zone, can be executed in a common production mode. Effect execution examples 77AK212 and 77AK213 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B2) and 10-16 (C2), and effect execution examples 77AK222 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B3) and 10-16 (C3) , and 77AK223, special colors are used to correspond to monochrome changes and golden color changes in the color change effect. In this case, like the production execution examples 77AK202 and 77AK203 shown in FIGS. , music phrases PHA1 and PHA2, it becomes possible to execute voice effects corresponding to the battle zone in a common effect mode. In this way, regardless of whether the colors are normal colors or special colors, a part of the battle zone production can be executed in a common production mode. Even if there is, the player can easily recognize that the battle zone performance is being executed, the player can pay attention to both the color change performance and the battle zone performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the color change effect and the battle zone effect can be executed, the color change effect reaches in the variable display that becomes the target change, like the timing T02 of the control example 78AKC01 shown in FIG. 10-17(A). It can be terminated at a timing provided after establishment. On the other hand, the battle zone effect ends the target variation by deriving and displaying the final stop symbol in the variable display as the target variation, like the timing T12 of the control example 78AKC02 shown in FIG. 10-17(B). It can be terminated at the timing of Thus, the battle zone effect can be ended at a timing later than the color change effect. In the period from timing T02 to timing T12 in control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02, during which the battle zone effect is executed after the color change effect ends, the effects shown in FIGS. As in execution examples 78AK111 to 78AK113, the battle zone effect can be executed in normal colors. In this way, since the battle zone production can be executed in normal colors after the color change production is completed, the player can easily recognize that the battle zone production continues to be executed while the color change production is completed. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color change presentation and the battle zone presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As the color change effect, as in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13 shown in FIG. 10-9(C) and FIG. - Any of a plurality of effects including a gold color change that changes the display color using gold color, such as the effect execution examples 77AKH22 and 77AKH23 shown in 10 (C) and FIG. 10-10 (D) is executable. In the color change synthesizing process shown in FIG. 10-20, steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05 are used in the case of changing the display color to gray scale corresponding to monochrome change and to the case of changing to gold color corresponding to gold color change. It is possible to perform common color change processing in In this way, since the common color change processing can be executed, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while reducing the processing load for changing the color of the effect display.

(Modified example of characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK)
The color change effect is to reduce the range of any of the color attributes such as hue, saturation, and brightness to a narrower range than the normal color, so that the various colors of multiple effects can be shared. Any effect that changes the color may be used. Instead of display colors using grayscale colors or display colors using gold colors, or in addition to display colors using grayscale colors or display colors using gold colors, for example, By displaying a multi-gradation monochromatic image using blue, green, red, and other arbitrary colors, the colors change from the normal colors of multiple presentation displays. It would be nice if it could be done. Instead of the color change effect, or in addition to the color change effect, for example, it may be possible to execute a pattern change effect in which various patterns of a plurality of effect displays are changed to a common pattern. In addition, it suffices if, as a special effect, a visibility change effect can be executed in which a plurality of effect displays are changed to an arbitrary display mode with common visibility by effect control at least partly common to the color change effect.

The specific effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state is not limited to the battle zone effect, but is based on the result of the winning judgment corresponding to the pending display, such as by displaying a different effect image prepared in advance from the normal time. , any effect that can suggest that the control is in an advantageous state. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may be any game state or presentation state in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal state. For example, a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state may be used as an advantageous state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). A game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10"), may be regarded as an advantageous state.

In the above embodiment, under the control of step 77AKS07 shown in FIG. 10-7, during the period when the color change effect is being executed, the sound effect is executed in the same effect mode as during the period when the color change effect is not being executed. described as possible. On the other hand, instead of or in addition to the voice effect, for example, lighting effect by lighting decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED, movable object operation effect by the operation of the movable body 32, etc. At least a part of the effects by the arbitrary effect devices provided in the pachinko game machine 1 can be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether or not the color change effect is executed.

During the period when the color change effect is being executed, the sound effect may be executed in a different effect mode from the period when the color change effect is not being executed. However, when execution of the battle zone effect is started during execution of the color change effect, the audio effect corresponding to the battle zone may be executed preferentially over the sound effect corresponding to the color change. As a result, a part of the battle zone effect, such as the voice effect included in the battle zone effect, may be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether the color change effect is executed. In place of or in addition to the sound effect, the battle zone effect includes at least a part of the effect by any effect device provided in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a light emission effect, a movable body motion effect, and others. In this case, part of the effects included in this battle zone effect may be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether or not the color change effect is executed.

When the execution of the battle zone performance is started during execution of the color change performance, the voice performance corresponding to the color change may be preferentially executed over the voice performance corresponding to the battle zone. For example, when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect, the voice effect corresponding to the battle zone is preferentially executed over the voice effect corresponding to the monochrome change. On the other hand, if the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the gold color change in the color change effect, the voice effect corresponding to the gold color change is given priority over the voice effect corresponding to the battle zone. Run. Here, the battle zone effect may be executed at a rate according to the variable display result so that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of the monochrome change, and the expectation of a big win is higher than that of the gold color change. As a result, part of the battle zone production, such as the voice production included in the battle zone production, is a common production when the color change production is executed in the first mode and when the color change production is not executed. On the other hand, when the color change effect is performed in the second mode, it may be possible to perform in a different effect mode than when the color change effect is not performed. When the battle zone effect is executed during execution of the golden color change in the color change effect, the voice effect can be executed in a special effect mode different from the case where the battle zone effect is not executed during the gold color change. There may be.

Even when the golden color change is executed in the color change effect, the layers AKL3 and AKL4 make the color of the effect image designated as the drawing target different from the normal color, similarly to the case where the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect. While the colors are changed to different colors, the layers AKL1 and AKL2 may be controlled so that the colors of the effect images designated as drawing targets are not changed to colors different from normal colors. In this way, the monochrome change target and the gold color change target are both layers AKL3 and AKL4, and layers AKL1 and AKL2 may not be included. In this case, the small pattern display area AKA1, which is the first interface display area, and the variable display-compatible display area AKA2, which is the second interface display area, maintain their normal colors without changing. The effect display in the story notice effect is the same color as the period in which the color change effect is not executed, regardless of whether the color change effect is a monochrome change or a golden color change. may be executable by

If layers AKL1 and AKL2 are not included in the gold-tone change target, in the color change synthesis process shown in FIG. should be done. In this case, after executing the image processing corresponding to the gold color change in steps 79AKS06 and 79AKS07, step 79AKS05 may be performed. Even in such a case, the color change processing by steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05 in the color change synthesis processing is common processing in the case where the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed and the case where the gold color change in the color change effect is executed. is executable as

The timing to end the color change effect is, for example, the timing when one or more pseudo-continuous fluctuations are executed before the ready-to-win establishment, the timing when a specific advance notice effect is executed, and the decorative pattern that is the specific chance eye. The timing of the stop display, the timing of execution of a development effect that develops from the reach effect of normal reach to the reach effect of super reach, or the timing of execution of a specific cut-in effect during the execution of reach effect. , the timing at which a specific movable body action effect is executed, and any other arbitrary timing after the execution of the variable display that becomes the target variation is started and before the final stop symbol is derived and displayed and the execution of the variable display is completed. may be When it is possible to end the color change performance at any one of a plurality of timings, the degree of expectation for big win may differ according to the timing at which the color change performance is ended. For example, by ending the color change effect at a later timing out of a plurality of timings, the timing of ending the color change effect increases as the execution period of the color change effect increases, so that the degree of expectation for the big win increases. may be determined. The timing for ending the color change effect may be set differently depending on whether or not the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state is executed during the execution of the variable display that causes the target variation. The timing of ending the battle zone production may be a timing that ends later than the color change production, and before the final stop pattern is derived and displayed in the variable display that becomes the target variation and the execution of the variable display is completed. may be the timing of

The rate at which the battle zone effect is executed may be varied depending on whether or not the color change effect is being executed. For example, when the color change effect is being executed, it may be possible to execute the battle zone effect at a higher rate than when the color change effect is not being executed. If the display result of the variable display that causes the target change is a "big hit", it is possible to execute the battle zone effect at a high rate while the color change effect is being executed, and the display result of the variable display that causes the target change is "losing". , it may be possible to execute the battle zone effect at a low rate during execution of the color change effect.

The story notice is included in the full-screen notice effect, and by displaying the notice effect image on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, it is limited to what is executed using an image larger than the step-up notice. Instead, even when displaying an effect image for notice on a part of the display screen, it may be possible to use an image larger than the step-up notice. Not limited to story notices and step-up notices, when the second notice effect is executed using an image larger than the first notice effect, the color change effect is executed even during the period in which the color change effect is executed. There may be times when it is feasible with no periods and common colors.

The display that does not change the color even if the color change effect is executed is the small pattern display area AKA1 or the second interface display area AKA2 that serves as the first interface display area, or the small pattern display that serves as the first interface display area. In addition to the area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2, a notification display related to variable display, a notification display related to the game, a notification display related to the effect setting, a notification display related to the occurrence of an abnormality, or a combination of some or all of these are included. You can

The notification display related to the variable display may include display of the fourth symbol, display of the remaining number of variable displays, display of the remaining time of the variable display, or a combination of some or all of these. The fourth design may be variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in synchronization with the special design or the decoration design. The variable display of the fourth pattern is either a small pattern display area AKA1 serving as a first interface display area or a display area AKA2 corresponding to variable display serving as a second interface display area, or a small pattern display. Display control that repeats display and non-display with a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth pattern display area that is provided separately from the area AKA1 and the variable display compatible display area AKA3 and that serves as a third interface display area. It is realized by continuing The display result in the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbols. The remaining number of variable display display is the remaining number of variable display where time saving control and probability variable control are performed, or color change production, battle zone production, and other variable display that will be the target change of the notice production that will be a pre-reading notice. It is sufficient if the number of remaining times is displayed in a identifiable manner. The remaining time of the variable display can be specified as the remaining time until the end of the variable display, or the remaining time until a specific effect is executed during the variable display in the last variable display where the time saving control and the variable probability control are performed. Anything that is displayed in the Alternatively, the remaining time of the variable display is the remaining time until the end of the variable display, or the execution of a specific effect during the variable display, for the color change effect, battle zone effect, and other variable displays that change the target of the advance notice effect. It is sufficient if the remaining time until the time is completed is displayed in a identifiable manner.

The game-related notification display may include a launch promotion display, an electric chew opening display, a payout number display, an area passage display, or a combination of some or all of these. The shooting promotion display may be a display that prompts the shooting of a game ball in a specific direction, for example, by right-handed notification or left-handed display. The electric chew open display may indicate that the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to an open state in which the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole in a identifiable manner. The display of the number of payouts may display the number of game balls paid out as prize balls so as to be identifiable. The area passing display may be any display that can specify that the game ball has passed through a specific passing area provided in the game area.

The display related to effect setting may include volume setting display, light amount setting display, mode selection display, or a combination of some or all of these. The volume setting display may be anything as long as the volume setting that can be changed by the player's operation in the pachinko game machine 1 can be specified. The light amount setting display may be anything as long as the setting of the light amount that can be changed by the operation of the player in the pachinko game machine 1 can be specified. The mode selection display may be anything as long as the setting of the production mode that can be selected by the operation of the player in the pachinko game machine 1 can be specified.

The notification display regarding the occurrence of an abnormality is a display for notifying an error that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a door opening error, an illegal prize winning error, a switch detection error, a prize ball payout error, a magnet error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, and a full error. Tongue errors, out-of-ball errors, stuck-in-ball errors, processor errors, memory errors, effect device errors, or a combination of some or all of these may be displayed so as to be identifiable.

In the above-described embodiment, in the variable display in which the judgment result at the time of winning is "general at the time of losing", the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect of the normal ready-to-win may be executed. 10-13, if the ready-to-reach state occurs before the target changes during execution of the color change effect, it is determined in step 77AKS36 that there is no target change. By doing so, it is restricted so that the notice is not executed after the reach is established. On the other hand, during the execution of the color change effect, by preventing the variable display of the decorative pattern from changing to the ready-to-win mode, it is restricted so that the notice after the ready-to-win is established is not executed before the target changes. You may For example, the winning judgment result that can be notified by the winning judgment result command includes "non-reach confirmation when losing" indicating that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the non-reach confirmation range when losing. good too. The non-reach determination range may be set in advance as a range of random values determined for the non-reach variation pattern regardless of the number of pending memories. In this case, in step 77AKS01 of the pre-reading notice setting process, if a winning judgment result different from "non-reach decision at the time of losing" is included before the winning judgment result of this time, color change restriction is performed. It should be judged as yes. In addition, in step 77AKS14 of the battle zone effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the result of determination at the time of winning is "non-reach determination when losing". If it is not "non-reach decision when losing", the process should proceed to step 77AKS16. As a result, the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win state during the execution of the color change effect or the battle zone effect, and the execution of the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win which is the special effect can be restricted.

The timing to start the color change effect is the timing when a predetermined time has passed after the timing when the game ball passed through the start area, the timing when a specific variable display effect is executed, and other timings when the game ball passes through the start area. It may be an arbitrary timing before starting the execution of the variable display that becomes the target variation after the target variation. The timing to start the battle zone production may be the timing that will start later than the color change production when the color change production is executed. The timing when the variation is executed, the timing when the specific notice effect is executed, the timing when the decorative pattern that is the specific chance is temporarily stopped, or after the reach is established, the normal reach effect is changed to the super reach effect. Timing when a development effect that develops into is executed, timing when a specific cut-in effect is executed during the execution of a reach effect, timing when a specific movable body action effect is executed, etc., and when the game ball passes through the starting area It may be any timing after the timing and before the execution of the variable display that becomes the target variation is started.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 77AK)
A game machine capable of performing a variable display based on the passage of game media through a starting area and being controllable to an advantageous state for a player, wherein a first display is performed from a timing corresponding to the passage of the game media through the starting area. In the period, a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed during the first period to a common color, and a specific effect executing means that can be executed in two periods, and when the special effect and the specific effect are both executed, the first period and the second period may overlap, and the specific effect executing means In the second period that does not overlap with the first period, the specific effect is performed in normal colors, and in the second period that overlaps with the first period, the specific effect is performed in the colors that have changed according to the special effect and the corresponding special colors. Part of the specific effect can be executed in a common effect mode in the case of the color and in the case of the special color. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The first period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The second period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. The second period that does not overlap with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T02 to timing T12. Execution of the specific effect in normal colors may be performed, for example, when there is no color change effect. The second period that overlaps with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T02. Execution of the specific effect with a special color may be, for example, in the case of a monochrome change or a golden color change due to a color change effect. A part of the specific effect that can be executed in a common effect mode may be, for example, a voice effect for outputting music phrases PHA1 and PHA2.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effects and the specific effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A specific performance can be executed after the execution of the special performance is started, and the execution of the special performance may be restricted after the execution of the specific performance is started. Here, the execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed at step 77AKS01.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation by means of the specific effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a start notification performance for notifying that the execution of the special performance is started, and when the predetermined advance notice performance is executed at the timing when the first period starts, it is given priority over the predetermined notice performance. , the start notification effect may be executed. Here, the start notification effect may be, for example, the message notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH22. The predetermined notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the execution of the special effect is to be started, thereby improving the interest in the game.

It may be possible to display special information regarding the progress of the game, and in the first period, display the special information in the same color as in periods other than the first period. Here, the special information display may be, for example, the information display of the first interface display area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of production execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while properly executing the special information display.

In the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, if the execution of the special effect is determined based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area, the execution of the special effect is executed after the stop display period ends. may be started. Here, the execution of the special effect is started after the end of the stop display period, for example, when the final stop pattern is being derived and displayed in step 77AKS04 and the color change effect start setting is performed in step 77AKS42. and so on.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

The special effects include a first special effect of changing to a first color and a second special effect of changing to a second color different from the first color, and either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Depending on the amount, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may differ. Here, the first special effect may be, for example, the case of monochrome change by color change effect. The second special effect may be, for example, the case of a golden color change by a color change effect.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation through the special effects and improve the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a first notice effect and a second notice effect using an image larger than the first notice effect, and in the first period, the first notice effect is changed in accordance with the special effect and the corresponding color. In the first period, the second notice effect may be executed in the same color as in periods other than the first period. Here, the first notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. The second notice effect may be, for example, a story notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. Execution can be performed with the changed color and the corresponding color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK214. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK215.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the advance notice effect and improve the game interest.

The special performance can be continuously executed until a specific timing during the execution of the target variable display, the special performance can be executed corresponding to the specific timing, and the execution of the special performance is restricted during the first period. You may Here, the specific timing may be, for example, timing T02 corresponding to reach establishment. The special effect may be, for example, an advance notice after establishment of reach. Execution of the special effect may be restricted when, for example, the color change effect is being performed in step 77AKS35.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When the special effect is executed, after reducing the number of colors of the image data to be displayed, image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied to change the color of the screen display. Here, the number of colors of the image data to be displayed may be reduced if, for example, monochrome conversion color blending is executed in step 79AKS03. The image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied, for example, when executing gold conversion color blending in step 79AKS06.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

Effect display may be performed with priority over display using image data to which image processing is applied. Here, the effect display may be, for example, an image display as an effect for gold in the display layer AKL0.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When a specific performance is executed in a second period overlapping with the first period, it may be possible to execute a parallel notification performance for reporting that the special performance is being executed in parallel with the specific performance. Here, the parallel notification effect may be, for example, the telop notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AK213 and 77AK223.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the execution of the special effect and the specific effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 78AK)
A game machine capable of performing a variable display based on the passage of game media through a starting area and being controllable to an advantageous state for a player, wherein a first display is performed from a timing corresponding to the passage of the game media through the starting area. In the period, a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed during the first period to a common color, and a specific effect executing means that can be executed in two periods, and when the special effect and the specific effect are both executed, the first period and the second period may overlap, and the specific effect executing means In the second period that does not overlap with the first period, the specific effect is executed with normal colors, and in the second period that overlaps with the first period, the specific effect is executed with the color changed according to the special effect and the corresponding special color, and the specified The performance can be finished at timing later than the special performance, and the specific performance can be executed in normal colors after the special performance is finished. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The first period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The second period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. The second period that does not overlap with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T02 to timing T12. Execution of the specific effect in normal colors may be performed, for example, when there is no color change effect. The second period that overlaps with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T02. Execution of the specific effect with a special color may be, for example, in the case of a monochrome change or a golden color change due to a color change effect. The timing later than the special effect may be, for example, timing T12. It is possible to execute the specific effect in normal colors, for example, in effect execution examples 78AK111 to 78AK113.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effects and the specific effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A specific performance can be executed after the execution of the special performance is started, and the execution of the special performance may be restricted after the execution of the specific performance is started. Here, the execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed at step 77AKS01.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation by means of the specific effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a start notification performance for notifying that the execution of the special performance is started, and when the predetermined advance notice performance is executed at the timing when the first period starts, it is given priority over the predetermined notice performance. , the start notification effect may be executed. Here, the start notification effect may be, for example, the message notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH22. The predetermined notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the execution of the special effect is to be started, thereby improving the interest in the game.

It may be possible to display special information regarding the progress of the game, and in the first period, display the special information in the same color as in periods other than the first period. Here, the special information display may be, for example, the information display of the first interface display area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of production execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while properly executing the special information display.

In the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, if the execution of the special effect is determined based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area, the execution of the special effect is executed after the stop display period ends. may be started. Here, the execution of the special effect is started after the end of the stop display period, for example, when the final stop pattern is being derived and displayed in step 77AKS04 and the color change effect start setting is performed in step 77AKS42. and so on.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

The special effects include a first special effect of changing to a first color and a second special effect of changing to a second color different from the first color, and either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Depending on the amount, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may differ. Here, the first special effect may be, for example, the case of monochrome change by color change effect. The second special effect may be, for example, the case of a golden color change by a color change effect.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation through the special effects and improve the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a first notice effect and a second notice effect using an image larger than the first notice effect, and in the first period, the first notice effect is changed in accordance with the special effect and the corresponding color. In the first period, the second notice effect may be executed in the same color as in periods other than the first period. Here, the first notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. The second notice effect may be, for example, a story notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. Execution can be performed with the changed color and the corresponding color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK214. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK215.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the advance notice effect and improve the game interest.

The special performance can be continuously executed until a specific timing during the execution of the target variable display, the special performance can be executed corresponding to the specific timing, and the execution of the special performance is restricted during the first period. You may Here, the specific timing may be, for example, timing T02 corresponding to reach establishment. The special effect may be, for example, an advance notice after establishment of reach. Execution of the special effect may be restricted when, for example, the color change effect is being performed in step 77AKS35.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When the special effect is executed, after reducing the number of colors of the image data to be displayed, image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied to change the color of the screen display. Here, the number of colors of the image data to be displayed may be reduced if, for example, monochrome conversion color blending is executed in step 79AKS03. The image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied, for example, when executing gold conversion color blending in step 79AKS06.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

Effect display may be performed with priority over display using image data to which image processing is applied. Here, the effect display may be, for example, an image display as an effect for gold in the display layer AKL0.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When a specific performance is executed in a second period overlapping with the first period, it may be possible to execute a parallel notification performance for reporting that the special performance is being executed in parallel with the specific performance. Here, the parallel notification effect may be, for example, the telop notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AK213 and 77AK223.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the execution of the special effect and the specific effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 79AK)
A game machine which performs variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player, wherein the predetermined period starts from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the starting area. a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect of changing a plurality of effect displays displayed during the predetermined period to a common color, wherein the special effect executing means changes to a first color as the special effect. and a second special effect of changing to a second color different from the first color. It further comprises change processing means capable of executing a common color change process when changing to two colors. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The predetermined period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The first special effect may be, for example, a case of monochrome change by color change effect. The second special effect may be, for example, the case of a golden color change by a color change effect. The change processing means may be, for example, VDP77AK132 that executes steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while reducing the processing load of the effect of changing the color.

When the specified period overlaps with the specified period in a state in which the specified effect executing means capable of executing the specified effect suggesting the control to be in an advantageous state during the specified period, and the special effect and the specified effect are both executed. , the specific performance can be executed after the execution of the special performance is started, and the execution of the special performance may be restricted after the execution of the specific performance is started. Here, the specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The specific period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. Execution of the special effect may be restricted when, for example, the battle zone effect is being executed at step 77AKS01.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation by means of the specific effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a start notification performance for notifying that the execution of the special performance is started, and when the predetermined advance notice performance is executed at the timing when the predetermined period starts, it is given priority over the predetermined notice performance. A start notification effect may be executed. Here, the start notification effect may be, for example, the message notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH22. The predetermined notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the execution of the special effect is to be started, thereby improving the interest in the game.

It may be possible to execute special information display regarding the progress of the game, and during a predetermined period, display the special information in the same color as during periods other than the predetermined period. Here, the special information display may be, for example, the information display of the first interface display area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of production execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while properly executing the special information display.

In the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, if the execution of the special effect is determined based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area, the execution of the special effect is executed after the stop display period ends. may be started. Here, the execution of the special effect is started after the end of the stop display period, for example, when the final stop pattern is being derived and displayed in step 77AKS04 and the color change effect start setting is performed in step 77AKS42. and so on.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

Depending on which one of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state may differ.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation through the special effects and improve the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a first notice effect and a second notice effect using an image larger than the first notice effect, and the first notice effect is performed with a color changed according to the special effect and a corresponding color in a predetermined period. It may be executable, and during a predetermined period, the second announcement effect may be executable in a color common to periods other than the predetermined period. Here, the first notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. The second notice effect may be, for example, a story notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. Execution can be performed with the changed color and the corresponding color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK214. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK215.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the advance notice effect and improve the game interest.

The special performance can be continuously executed until a specific timing during the execution of the target variable display, the special performance can be executed corresponding to the specific timing, and the execution of the special performance is restricted during a predetermined period. may Here, the specific timing may be, for example, timing T02 corresponding to reach establishment. The special effect may be, for example, an advance notice after establishment of reach. Execution of the special effect may be restricted when, for example, the color change effect is being performed in step 77AKS35.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When executing a special effect, after reducing the number of colors of image data to be displayed, image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied to change a plurality of effect displays to a common color. . Here, the number of colors of the image data to be displayed may be reduced if, for example, monochrome conversion color blending is executed in step 79AKS03. The image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied, for example, when executing gold conversion color blending in step 79AKS06.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

Effect display may be performed with priority over display using image data to which image processing is applied. Here, the effect display may be, for example, an image display as an effect for gold in the display layer AKL0.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When the specified period overlaps with the specified period in a state in which the specified effect executing means capable of executing the specified effect suggesting the control to be in an advantageous state during the specified period, and the special effect and the specified effect are both executed. and when a specific performance is executed in a specific period overlapping with a predetermined period, it may be possible to execute a parallel notification performance for notifying that the special performance is being executed in parallel with the specific performance. Here, the parallel notification effect may be, for example, the telop notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AK213 and 77AK223.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the execution of the special effect and the specific effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 074AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 074AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 074AK of the present embodiment, as the pre-reading announcement effect, a change effect is performed in which the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (holding display or active display) is changed to a mode different from normal. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 074AK, the image including the image that notifies the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state at least by the type of color, such as the display corresponding to the variable display, is set to the monochrome mode. It is possible to execute a monochrome effect that makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize whether the color is displayed (what degree of expectation the display color is). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 074AK of the present embodiment, when a change effect is executed during execution of a monochrome effect, the display color of the variable display compatible display is displayed in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation, It has a feature that when the monochrome presentation ends, it becomes possible to visually recognize which level of expectation the display color is. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 074AK having such characteristics will be described.

Also, the state in which the monochrome effect is being executed may be referred to as the monochrome effect state or the specific effect state, and the state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed may be referred to as the normal effect state. In addition, in the monochrome rendering state in this embodiment, the background image is also in a monochrome mode, and is represented only by the shades of black. In addition, in the monochrome rendering state (specific rendering state), in addition to black shading, red or blue shading may be used, or black on green or black on red may be used. Furthermore, if it is impossible to recognize the degree of expectation due to color, and if the number of colors used is less than in the normal production state (unless it is full color), it is not limited to being displayed entirely in monochrome, for example, the background It may be displayed in two colors, such as displaying a part in monochrome (shading of black) and displaying the other part in yellow (a specific color such as yellow is displayed in that color, and the other part is displayed in may be displayed in shades of black). In addition, the monochrome effect changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the side of the effect control board 12 along with the start of execution of the monochrome effect. This is an effect in which the number of colors used when displaying a pre-stored effect image is displayed with a smaller number of colors than in the normal effect state. In other words, it does not store separate data such as the effect image for monochrome effect, but during the execution of monochrome effect (during specific effect state), the target image such as pending display or active display is changed effect. It is displayed in a monochrome mode regardless of whether it is broken or not.

FIG. 11A is a flow chart showing an example of the pre-reading notice setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. When the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-1 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command is received (step 074AKS001). When it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step 074AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received starting winning command is the first starting winning designation command received in the low base state or the high base It is determined whether it is any of the second start winning designation command received in the state (step 074AKS002). In this embodiment, by executing the processing of step 074AKS002, in the low base state, when the pending memory increases based on the winning to the first start winning port, the pending notice effect (variation effect) can be executed. , in the high base state, when the pending memory increases based on the winning to the second starting winning hole, the pending notice performance (variation performance) can be executed.

If it is determined to be either the first starting winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 074AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed (step 074AKS003). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display as the final change destination of the reserved display displayed as the first reserved display or the second reserved display, depending on the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display. A display mode (how many stages to change when a change effect is executed) is determined. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 may acquire the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result designation command included in the start winning command. The symbol determination result specification command and the variation pattern determination result specification command are included in the winning judgment result command, and based on the random number value extracted when the first start condition and the second start condition are met, the variable display result and the variation Any effect control command may be used as long as it can specify the determination result of the pattern.

FIG. 11-2 shows a configuration example of the active display mode determination table. The active display mode determination table is referenced to determine the display mode of active display at step 074AKS003. The display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be changed stepwise by a change effect. The change effect can also change step by step the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started. The active display mode determination table is a table for determining in advance the display mode of active display (also referred to as “final display mode”), which is the final stage of change (transition) of the display mode. The active display mode determination table assigns a determination ratio for determining which of stages 1 to 4 the final display mode should be for each variable display result (including jackpot types and variation patterns). More specifically, the variable display result is divided into "jackpot (probability / non-probability)", "jackpot (probability)", "losing (super reach) / small hit", "other than above", respectively, Different determination ratios are assigned to "white", "blue", "green", and "red" prepared as display colors of the active display. In this embodiment, active display is performed in colors such as white in stage 1, blue in stage 2, green in stage 3, and red in stage 4. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probability variable/non-probability variation)" in which a 16-round game is executed, the active display mode (display color), which is the final display mode, is: ``Green'', which is ``Level 3'', has the highest decision ratio, and the decision ratio is lower in the order of ``Blue'' for ``Level 2'', ``White'' for ``Level 1'', and ``Red'' for ``Level 4''. is set to On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot (accurate)" in which two rounds of the game are played, the ratio of determining the active display mode (display color) to "green", which is "level 3", is the highest, Next, the decision ratio of "blue" in "level 2" is high, and the decision ratio of "red" in "level 4" and "white" in "level 1" is set to be the lowest. In addition, when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit" including super reach effects in the variation pattern, the active display mode (display color) is "step 2" "blue ” is the highest, followed by the same percentage for “white” in “stage 1” and “green” in “stage 3”, followed by “red” in “stage 4”. there is If the variable display result does not correspond to any of the above-mentioned "big hit (probability / non-probability)", "big hit (probably)", "losing (super reach)", and "minor hit", the active display mode ( display color), the decision ratio is set only for "white". Further, when the variable display result is "missing", the active display mode (display color) is set not to be determined to be "red".

With these settings, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage of "stage 4", the variable display result will always be "big hit". can be notified. In addition, when the active display changes to the "green" stage of "stage 3", it can be suggested that the variable display result is likely to be a "jackpot" (probability/non-probability/abrupt probability). . In addition, if it remains "white" of "step 1", the possibility that the variable display result will be "losing" or "minor hit" is high, and if the pending notice effect is executed (that is, When the display mode of the pending display changes), it can be suggested that there is a higher possibility that the control will be in a state more advantageous to the player than when it is not executed.

In the change effect (suspended notice effect), the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" in which the variable display result always becomes "big win" is also called a big win decision stage. In addition, the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is the jackpot confirmation stage, and as shown in FIG. 11-2, 10% Because it is only selected, its rarity value is high. In the illustrated example, the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is shown as the big hit confirmation stage, but for example, when the variable display result is "losing" or "minor hit", it is also determined You may do so (that is, it may not be a big hit confirmation). In this case, if the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is determined, the possibility of becoming a "jackpot" will increase (the higher the number of stages, the higher the possibility of becoming a "jackpot". ), it is sufficient to set the decision ratio.

Returning to FIG. 11-1, after determining the display mode of the active display by the process of step 074AKS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003, the first pending storage number notification command or the second A display mode change pattern is determined according to the number of reserved memories indicated by one of the reserved memory number notification commands, and the display is updated so as to add the first reserved display or the second reserved display (step 074AKS004). When the first starting prize winning opening designation command is received, the reserved memory number may be specified by referring to the first reserved memory number notification command. When the second starting prize winning opening designation command is received, the number of reserved memories may be specified by referring to the second reserved memory number notification command. In the process of step 074AKS004, the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-3 to 11-7 is referenced to determine the display mode change pattern for the first pending display or second pending display. The display mode change pattern indicates a change pattern such as to what stage (to which display color) after how many times the pending display is shifted until the active display, which is the final stage, is displayed. The display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 is stored in the storage area of the display mode variation pattern in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning or the command buffer at the time of the second start winning provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. .

The display mode change pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-3 to 11-7 are referred to for determining display mode change patterns indicating changes in the display modes of the pending display and the active display that are subject to the notice of the pending notice effect. table. The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the pending number (suspended display number of the pending memory that is the notice target of the pending notice effect) and the active display mode (final display mode). Specifically, depending on the number of pending "4" to "2", and the active display of "white", "blue", "green", "red" such as "stage 1" to "stage 4" The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the display color. In addition, in each display mode change pattern determination table classified by the number of reservations and the active display mode, "jackpot (16R)" ("jackpot (probability / non-probability)"), "jackpot (probability)", "loss (super A different decision ratio is assigned to the display mode change pattern set according to the active display mode (final display mode) for each variable display result such as "reach" and "minor win".

The pending display is displayed in any stage of 'white', 'blue', 'green' and 'red' such as 'stage 1' to 'stage 4' at the start of the pending display associated with the start winning. In addition, the pending display is displayed in shift as the pending memory is consumed, and at the timing when the change effect (holding notice effect) is executed, during the execution of the new variable display (including the variable display corresponding to the active display) , can be changed to different display colors (steps), and "white" as "step 1" → "blue" as "step 2" → "green" as "step 3" → "green" as "step 4" It changes step by step in the order of red. Also, the active display may be displayed by changing the stage from the reserved display corresponding to the reserved display number "1". In addition, when changing the stage, only a change to a higher stage is allowed (no change from a higher stage to a lower stage), for example, "white" in "stage 1" → "green" in "stage 3" It may be changed to a higher stage by omitting the middle.

Figures 11-3 (A) to 11-4 (D) show when the pending memory number (holding number) is "4" (when the pending memory of the notice target of the pending notice effect is the pending display number "4"). 4 shows a display mode change pattern determination table referred to in FIG. In these display mode change pattern determination tables, display mode change patterns indicating changes in the display mode of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are set. .

FIG. 11-3(A) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "white" of "stage 1". As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), when the final display mode is "white" of "stage 1", the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and "0" Only the display mode change pattern PT4-1-01 (the number of display mode changes "0") is set so that the display color of the active display remains "white" of "step 1", and the decision ratio assigned for each variable display result is set. is uniformly 100%.

FIG. 11-3(B) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "level 2" or "blue". As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "stage 2". PT 4-2-01 (the number of times the display mode has changed is “0”), which remains “blue”, and is “step 1” in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4”, and the pending display number “3” ~ PT 4-2-02 ~ 05 (display mode change number of times "1") is set. As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), when the variable display result is "losing (super reach)" or "minor win", display mode change pattern PT4-2-02 with display mode change count of "1" to 05, the decision ratio assigned to the display mode change pattern PT4-2-05 is the highest compared to other variable display results, and the decision ratio assigned to PT4-2-02 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", it is assigned to PT4-2-02 among the display mode change patterns PT4-2-02 to PT4-2-05 whose display mode change count is "1". The decision percentage is the highest and the decision percentage assigned to PT 4-2-05 is the lowest. With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes from "white" of "step 1" to "blue" of "step 2", the variable display is "big hit (16R) It can be suggested that there is a high possibility that Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-2-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 2" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 2" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Further, the display mode change pattern determination table is determined so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes from "stage 1" to "stage 2", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You can set a percentage. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display.

FIG. 11-3(C) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "green" of "stage 3". As shown in FIG. 11-3(C), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "step 3". PT 4-3-01 (display mode change count “0”), which remains “green” and does not change, and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4” is “stage 1” and the pending display number “3” ~ PT4-3-02 ~ 05 that changes from "white" of "step 1" to "green" of "step 3" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to "0" (display mode change number "1 ”), and “blue” in “stage 2” in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4”, and in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers “3” to “0” In PT4-3-06-09 (display mode change number "1") that changes from "level 2" "blue" to "level 3" "green" and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" "Stage 1" "white" and "stage 1" "white" to "stage 2" "blue" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" , and PT4-3-10 to PT4-3-14 (number of times of display mode change "2") for changing from "blue" of "step 2" to "green" of "step 3" are set. In the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-3(C), determination ratios are assigned so that the greater the number of times the display mode changes, the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". . Further, the determination ratio is assigned such that the later the timing of changing to the "green" display mode of "step 3", the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the timing at which the display mode changes to 'green' of 'stage 3' is delayed, and the greater the number of changes, the more the variable display becomes 'big hit (16R)'. suggest that it is likely. Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-3-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 3" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 3" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes to "stage 3", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. In addition, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the pattern that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "green" in "stage 3" at once in multiple stages has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You may set the determination ratio of a table. According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIG. 11D is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "red" of "stage 4". As shown in FIG. 11-4(D), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "stage 4". PT 4-4-01 (the number of times the display mode has changed is "0"), and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" is "white" at "step 1", and the pending display PT 4-4-02 to 05 (display mode number of changes "1") and "blue" of "step 2" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" Corresponds to PT 4-4-06 to 09 (number of display mode changes "1") that changes from "blue" of "stage 2" to "red" of "stage 4" in any of the above, and the pending display number "4" "Green" of "Stage 3" in the pending display, and "Green" of "Stage 3" to "Stage 4" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" PT 4-4-10 to 13 (the number of display mode changes "1") that changes to "red" of ", and "white" of "step 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", From ``white'' in ``step 1'' to ``blue'' in ``step 2'' and further from ``blue'' in ``step 2'' in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" PT4-4-14 to 19 (display mode change number "2") that changes to "red" in "step 4", and "white" in "step 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" In either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0", from "level 1" "white" to "level 3" "green", further "level 3" " PT 4-4-20 to 25 (display mode change number "2") that changes from "green" to "red" in "stage 4", and in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", "stage 1" " "White", and in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0", from "White" in "Stage 1" to "Blue" in "Stage 2", to "Stage 2" ” from “blue” to “stage 3” “green”, and from “stage 3” “green” to “stage 4” “red” PT 4-4-26 to 29 (display mode change number “3 ”) is set. In the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(D), determination ratios are assigned so that the greater the number of times the display mode changes, the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". . Further, the determination ratio is assigned such that the later the timing of changing to the "red" display mode of "stage 4", the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". Also, if the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit", the final display mode will not be "stage 4", so the display mode change pattern PT4-4-01 to 17 has a determination ratio Not assigned. With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the timing at which the display mode changes to "red" of "stage 4" is delayed and the number of times of change increases, the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". suggest that it is likely. Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-4-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 4" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 4" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes to "stage 4", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. Also, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the pattern that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "red" in "stage 4" at once in multiple stages has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You may set the determination ratio of a table. According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIGS. 11-5(A) to 11-6(D) are display modes referred to when the number of reservations is "3" (when the reservation memory of the notice object of the reservation notice effect is the reservation display number "3"). 4 shows a change pattern determination table; In these display mode change pattern determination tables, display mode change patterns indicating changes in the display mode of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "3" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are set. . In addition, FIGS. 11-7 (A) to (D) show the display mode change pattern referred to when the number of reservations is "2" (when the reservation memory of the notice target of the reservation notice effect is the reservation display number "2") Fig. 4 shows a decision table; In these display mode change pattern determination tables, display mode change patterns indicating changes in the display mode of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "2" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are set. . As for these, similarly to the display mode change pattern determination tables in FIGS. A decision ratio is assigned so that the variable display is more likely to be a "jackpot (16R)".

Returning to the explanation of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-1, after executing the process of step 074AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 executes the monochrome effect setting process for executing the monochrome effect (step 074AKS005). In the monochrome rendering, an image including an image that notifies the degree of expectation to be controlled at least to an advantageous state by the type of color, such as a display corresponding to variable display, is displayed in a monochrome mode, and in which kind of color it is displayed ( This is an effect that makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize which level of expectation the display color is. It should be noted that after executing the processing of steps 074AKS003 and step 074AKS004, the monochrome effect setting processing is performed in step 074AKS005. The display mode of the active display and the display mode change pattern may be determined.

FIG. 11-8 is a flow chart showing an example of monochrome effect setting processing executed in step 074AKS005 of FIG. 11-1. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag indicating that the monochrome effect is being executed is set to the ON state (step 074AKS051). If the monochrome effect flag is ON (step 074AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process. The monochrome effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example.

When the monochrome effect flag is in the OFF state (step 074AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs a hold (including an active display) in which the display mode changes before the current hold targeted for the pre-reading notice. exists, that is, whether or not the display form of the pending or active display existing in front (the display form in front) changes (step 074AKS051A). In step 074AKS051A, the content of the command buffer at the time of start winning may be checked and determined. Specifically, the display mode change pattern corresponding to the pending display number before the pending display number targeted this time is confirmed. Then, it is determined whether or not the front display mode changes.

When the front display mode changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process. In this embodiment, once the monochrome effect is executed, at least the monochrome effect is continued until the variable display corresponding to the target pending display is started. And it becomes impossible to visually recognize the change of the active display. Therefore, when the front display mode changes, the change in the front display mode is made visible without executing the monochrome effect.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of display mode changes is one or more, that is, whether or not to execute a change effect (step 074AKS052 ). Whether or not the display mode change count is one or more may be determined by confirming the display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. 11-1. When the display mode change count is 0 (step 074AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process.

If the display mode change count is one or more (step 074AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the monochrome effect according to the variable display result and according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-9 ( step 074AKS053). As shown in FIG. 11-9, in this embodiment, when the monochrome effect is executed, the determination ratio is assigned so that the variable display result is expected to be a big hit higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed. . Also, when the monochrome effect is executed, the determination ratio is assigned so as to be super reach or higher (super reach loss, small hit, big hit). Not limited to this, even in the case of normal reach loss or non-reach loss, monochrome effect may be executed at a lower rate than other variable display results. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the monochrome effect is assigned according to the variable display result. Different determination ratios may be used. For example, the determination rate may be highest when the display mode of the active display is "red", and the determination rate may decrease in the order of "green" > "blue" > "white". According to this, it is possible to inform the player that the display mode of the active display will finally change to a highly anticipated display color, and to give the player a sense of anticipation for the change in the active display.

After executing the processing of step 074AKS053 shown in FIG. 11-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054). If the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process. If the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the end timing of the monochrome effect from "timing 1" to "timing 1" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 3” (step 074AKS055). "Timing 1" in this embodiment is the timing of normal reach, that is, the timing immediately after reaching the reach state, "timing 2" is the timing at the start of the reach effect of super reach, and "timing 3" is the timing of super reach. It is the timing of the middle stage of the reach production. That is, "timing 1" is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, "timing 2" is the next earliest, and "timing 3" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 11-10, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation is "timing 3">"timing 2">"timing 1", and the period from the start of the variable display to the end timing is long. The determination ratio is set such that the later the end timing (in other words, the longer the execution period of the monochrome effect), the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit". Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution period of the monochrome effect. In addition, as shown in the figure, if the variable display result is neither "big hit (probable / non-probable)", "big hit (probably)", or "losing (super reach) / small hit", but "other than the above" , no decision ratio is assigned because no monochrome effect is executed.

After executing the process of step 074AKS055 shown in FIG. 11-8, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control for executing a monochrome effect (step 074AKS056). By performing the process of step 074AKS056, the execution of monochrome effect (monochrome output process) is started. As a result, monochrome target images, such as pending display, active display, and background image, are displayed in monochrome mode. In the characteristic portion 074AK of this embodiment, the pending display and the active display are displayed in the first stage "white" (displayed in a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). In step 074AKS056, output sounds such as sound effects and performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome performance are muted, and a game effect lamp for game effects is turned off. Control for extinguishing 9 is performed. After executing the processing of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120 sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and then ends the monochrome effect setting process. In step 074AKS056, for example, when an image to be monochrome is displayed in two colors, black and white, by monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is also changed to two colors, black and white. The number of colors may correspond to the number of colors.

In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-1, in step 074AKS002, either the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second start winning opening designation command received in the high base state When it is determined that there is no (step 074AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pending display or the second pending display in the display mode of the first stage (white) (step 074AKS005A). After executing the processing of either step 074AKS005 or step 074AKS005A, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received in the processing of step 074AKS001 (step 074AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of variation. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (step 074AKS006). Effect control CPU120, for example, by referring to whether or not either the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set, whether or not the fluctuation start designation command is received It is necessary to determine whether If it is determined that the variation start designation command has not been received (step 074AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the pending display setting process.

When it is determined that the variation start designation command is received (step 074AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007). When it is determined that the received variation start designation command is not the second variation start designation command, that is, the received variation start designation command is the first variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 By referring to the display mode change pattern stored in the display mode change pattern storage area in the first start winning command buffer, each first pending display is changed or maintained according to the display mode change pattern associated with each. , in the first holding display portion 5HL of the image display device 5, the holding display of the holding display number "1" is moved (shifted) to the active display area, and each corresponding to "2" to "4" The display position of the first pending display is moved (shifted) one by one to the right (step 074AKS008). After that, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the reservation display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, and shifts the storage contents corresponding to the reservation display numbers "1" to "4" one by one. (Step 074AKS009), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the storage contents of the reserved display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start prize are derived and displayed after the final stop pattern is derived and displayed in the effect processing during variable display in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it later.

In step 074AKS007, when it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 stores the display mode change pattern in the second start winning command buffer. With reference to the display mode change pattern stored in the area, each second suspension display is changed or maintained according to the display mode change pattern associated with each, and the second suspension display unit 5HR of the image display device 5 suspends Move (shift) the pending display of the pending display number of display number "1" to the active display area, and move the display position of each second pending display corresponding to "2" to "4" one by one to the left. (shift) (step 074AKS010). After that, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the reservation display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and shifts the storage contents corresponding to the reservation display numbers "1" to "4" one by one. (Step 074AKS011), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the stored content of the pending display number "0" in the second start winning command buffer is derived and displayed after the final stop pattern is derived and displayed in the effect processing during variable display in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it later.

FIG. 11-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first, for example, based on the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main substrate 11, etc. It is determined whether or not the result of the diagram display is "loss" (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "losing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, receives the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 (stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area command) is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2, PC1-1) corresponding to the case of "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode. It is determined whether or not (step S552). When it is determined to be a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S553). For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the non-reach combination updated by the production random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121. Determined decorative patterns (decorative patterns of non-ready-to-win combinations) are determined by referring to a pre-stored and prepared non-ready-to-win combination decorative pattern determination table. When it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of final stop symbols constituting the reach combination (step S554). For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the ready-to-win combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for producing, and prepares the ready-to-win combination which is stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to the decorative design determination table, etc., the determined decorative design (decorative design of the reach combination) is determined.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is not "losing" in the process of step S551 (step S551; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "definite". Or, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S555). If it is determined that the special figure display result is "probability" or "small hit" (step S555; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, an open chance eye, in the case of "probability" or "small hit". A combination of final decoration symbols corresponding to the case is determined (step S556). Effect control CPU120, for example, in response to the fact that either the variation pattern PC1-1 or PC1-2 is specified by the variation pattern specification command, out of the plurality of types of open chance eyes, the final A combination of fixed decoration patterns to be a stop pattern is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the chance number to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting section is extracted, and a predetermined chance number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to it, it is sufficient to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that form one of the open chances. In the chance determination table, there are, for example, "3", "5", and "7" composed of odd numbers as chances for the big hit, and "2" and "7" composed of even numbers as the chance for the small win. 4", "6", etc. may be set.

In the processing of step S555, if the special figure display result is determined to be neither "probably" nor "small hit" (step S555; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol that constitutes the big hit combination. A combination of symbols is determined (step S557). The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit fixed symbol that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect. Subsequently, according to the jackpot type specified by the display result specifying command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5 is displayed by referring to a jackpot confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance and prepared in the ROM 121. The decoration symbols having the same symbol number, which are stop-displayed together in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the display area, are determined. After executing any one of the processes of steps S553, S554, S556, and S557, the effect control CPU 120 performs a plurality of types of change effects with different periods from the start of the variable display until the display mode of the pending display changes. Of these, a change effect setting process for setting which type of change effect is to be executed is executed (step 074AKS021).

FIG. 11-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step 074AKS021 of FIG. 11-11. When the change effect setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display mode of any of the pending display or the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022). At step 074AKS022, by referring to the display mode change pattern determined at step 074AKS004 in FIG. is changed, or whether the display mode of the active display is changed.

When the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the change effect of the success mode (step 074AKS023). , ends the change effect setting process. On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending display or the active display does not change in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the setting for executing the change effect of the failure mode or the setting not to execute the change effect is performed. (Step 074AKS024), the change effect setting process is terminated. In step 074AKS024, whether or not to execute the change effect of the failure mode may be determined according to the variable display result or the variation pattern, for example.

The effect of changing the success mode in this embodiment is the effect of changing the display mode when the shooting star image 074AK001 collides with the pending display or active display to be changed. The failure mode change effect is a effect in which the shooting star image 074AK002 collides with the pending display or active display to be changed, but the display mode is not changed. In both modes, the image of the shooting star is the same, and it is impossible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the object changes until after the collision. In addition, during the monochrome effect, the pending display and the active display of the change target are also displayed in monochrome. there is

In the processing of step 074AKS023 and step 074AKS024, when executing a change effect, the execution period (change effect period) of the change effect is also set. The change effect period may be any period as long as it is a period during which the variable display being executed is not performed during the ready-to-win effect of super reach. This prevents the player's attention from being dispersed due to the degree of expectation being dispersed between the ready-to-win effect being executed and the change effect. Also, if there are a plurality of objects to be changed, any one of success mode, failure mode, and no change effect may be determined for each suspension (including active display). When the display mode change pattern is determined, the pattern of the change effect may also be determined from among a plurality of patterns for one display mode change pattern.

In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-11, after step 074AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the effect control pattern (step S560). Production control CPU120, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result designation command, selects one of the plurality of prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern), use set as a pattern. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (suspended display change pattern) corresponding to the execution setting of the pending display change effect by the pending display setting process of step S161, and selects the use pattern set as Also, when it is determined in step S559 that the specific effect is to be executed, one of the effect control patterns (specific effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution of the specific effect is selected and set as the usage pattern.

Following the process of step S560, the production control CPU 120, for example, corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command, the production provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 The initial value of the control process timer is set (step S561). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation) determined in the process of step S559 VDP of the display control unit 123 , etc., to start the fluctuation of the decorative patterns in the respective “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. All you have to do is Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then ends the variable display start setting process.

FIGS. 11-13 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect processing during variable display executed in step S172 shown in FIG. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 11-13 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. Determine (step S801). Production control CPU120, for example, to update the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, 1 subtraction), when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update. Then, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed in the process of step S801 (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect (step S802). The ready-to-win effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined according to the variation pattern, for example. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the ready-to-win effect (step S803). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031). Since the end timing of the monochrome effect is determined to be one of the timings 1 to 3 at step 074AKS055 in FIG. It should be determined whether or not there is If it is time to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect end control to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS032), and clears the monochrome effect flag to the OFF state (step 074AKS033). In the processing of step 074AKS032, since the monochrome output processing is completed, the number of colors used for the target image to be displayed in the monochrome mode returns to the normal number of colors. Therefore, control is performed to display the pending display and the active display whose display mode has been changed by the change effect in the display color after the change, and to output the success sound.

After executing the processing of step 074AKS033, if it is determined that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step S802 (step S802; No), or if it is determined that it is not the end timing of monochrome effect in step 074AKS031 (step 074AKS031; No), The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode (step 074AKS034). The change effect period is set in accordance with the setting to execute the change effect at step 074AKS023 or step 074AKS024 in FIGS. 11-12. When it determines with it being a change production|presentation period (step 074AKS034; Yes), CPU120 for production|presentation control performs control for performing the change production|presentation of a success mode or a failure mode (step 074AKS035). In the process of step 074AKS035, during the specific effect state during execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is ON), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, Regardless of the degree of expectation of a big hit, pending display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern. In addition, in the processing of step 074AKS035, the execution start sound of the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode, that is, the effect start sound for informing the player that the shooting star image has been displayed, and the success effect or failure effect are performed. A success sound or a failure sound that makes it audibly recognizable is output. However, during execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is ON), only the execution start sound is output, and the success sound or failure sound is not output. The success sound or the failure sound may be output at the timing when the monochrome effect is completed, for example, by the processing of step 074AKS032. According to this, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the pending display or the active display to be changed is changed after the monochrome effect is finished.

After executing the process of step 074AKS035, or if it is not a change production period (step 074AKS034; No), the production control CPU 120, for example, based on the settings in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decoration pattern (step 808), the effect processing during the variable display is terminated.

When it is determined that the variable display time has passed in the process of step S801 (step S801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Then, control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S809). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined fixed time as a waiting time for receiving a command to start a big hit (step S811). Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S812). After step S812, or when it is determined in the process of step S809 that the design confirmation command has not been received (step S809; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect process during variable display.

FIGS. 11-14 and 11-15 show examples of effect operations when monochrome effects and change effects are performed. As shown in FIG. 11-14(A), a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is displayed in a state in which three pending displays H1 to H3 are stored. In this state, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds such as sound effects and production sounds, and the game effect lamp 9 for game effects is also lit. Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning slot (reservation display H4 is displayed), monochrome effect setting processing is performed in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 11-1, and monochrome effect is executed. be. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the image display device 5 displays a background image, a pending display, and the like in a monochrome mode, and outputs sound effects, production sounds, and the like from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control is performed to mute the sound and turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. FIG. 11-14(B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-14(A) is finished. Also, an example is shown in which the display mode of the pending display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIG. 11-4. In this example, it is assumed that timing C, which is the middle stage of super ready-to-win, is determined as the end timing of the monochrome presentation at step 074AKS055 in FIG. 11-8.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-14(C), when each pending display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is started, the pending display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Since the suspension of the suspension display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the suspension display H4 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the effect of changing the success mode set in the process of step 074AKS023 in FIGS. 11-12 is performed. At this time, since the monochrome effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. Although the effect start sound for notifying the player is output, the success sound is not output. In addition, since the pending display is displayed in a monochrome mode during the monochrome presentation, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (success mode or failure mode). As shown in FIG. 11-14 (D), the ready-to-reach effect of super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. 11-14 (E), when the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 ends, As shown in (F), each hold display shifts, and a variable display corresponding to hold display H2 is started. Since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display form change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display form of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display. Therefore, when the failure mode change effect is set in the process of step 074AKS024 in FIG. 11-12, the failure mode change effect is performed as shown in FIG. 11-14(F). Even if the failure mode change performance is executed, the execution start sound, that is, the performance start sound for informing the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed is output, but the failure sound is not output. In addition, since the pending display is displayed in a monochrome mode during the monochrome presentation, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (success mode or failure mode).

After that, when the game ball newly wins the first start winning slot (reservation display H5 is displayed), although the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 11-1, the monochrome effect is executed. 11-8), the processing of steps 074AKS003 and 074AKS004 in FIG. becomes. FIG. 11-14(G) shows an example of completion of the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-14(F). Also, an example is shown in which the display mode of the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 11-5. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-14(H), each hold display shifts, and a variable display corresponding to hold display H3 is started. Since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display form of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display, while the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to the pattern of PT3-2-22. 04, the display mode of the pending display H5 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the change effect of the failure mode is performed for the suspension display H4, and the change effect of the success mode is performed for the suspension display H5. Since the monochrome effect is being executed, the player cannot recognize whether each change effect is a success mode or a failure mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-15 (I), the reach effect of super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. 11-15 (J), when the variable display corresponding to the pending display H3 ends, As shown in (K), each hold display shifts, and a variable display corresponding to hold display H4 is started. Since the suspension of suspension display H4 (active display AH) changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of active display AH changes in this variable display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-15(L), a success mode change effect is performed. Note that FIG. 11-15(L) shows an example in which in the process of step 074AKS023 in FIG. 11-12, the change effect period is set during the reach effect of super reach. On the other hand, since the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 11-5, the display mode of the hold display H5 does not change in this variable display. In the illustrated example, regarding the hold of the hold display H5, an example is shown in which the change effect is set not to be executed in the process of step 074AKS024 of FIGS. 11-12.

When it comes to the middle stage of super reach, it is determined that it is the end timing of monochrome effect at step 074AKS031 in FIG. 11-13, and as shown in FIG. The game effect lamp 9 is lit, and success sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, if the display mode changes even once during the monochrome effect, a success sound is output. In this case, the success sound may be output once after the failure sound is output twice, so that the player can recognize by hearing how many times the display mode has changed. . According to this, it is possible to inform the player of the timing when the display mode is changed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. As shown in FIG. 11-15(M), when the monochrome rendering ends, the display color of the pending display H5 and the display color of the active display AH become visible. After that, the variable display ends. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15(M), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIG. , and the variable display result after that is "big hit". Since the pending display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 11-5, the display mode is "green" in the example shown in FIG. 11-15(M). It should be noted that the change in display mode may be a change in shape in addition to color. Further, for example, the color of the effect image displayed around the active display and the suspended display may be changed. Furthermore, in addition to changing the shape of the active display and the hold display, the color of the effect image may also be changed. Such a change may be performed during the monochrome effect, or the monochrome effect may be started by performing these changes.

As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 074AK, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and during execution of the monochrome effect (specific effect state), the number of colors of images including pending display and active display is displayed less than in the normal effect state. In the specific production state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the normal production state, and in the normal production state, by executing the change production, the display color of the pending display and the active display is changed to a color according to the expectation level. Then, in the specific effect state, monochrome output processing is performed to display the display mode of the suspended display and the active display in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation. Then, when the specific effect state shifts to the normal effect state, the monochrome output process is finished, and the display modes of the pending display and the active display are displayed in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the pending display and the active display in the first stage "white" during the specific effect state, regardless of the degree of expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the process of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120, for example, when the monochrome target image is displayed in two colors, black and white, by monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is also two colors, black and white. The number of colors is set to correspond to the number of colors of a monochrome image, such as . According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect state stand out and improve the game interest.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing a monochrome effect (monochrome output process) in the process of step 074AKS056. As a result, monochrome target images, such as pending display, active display, and background image, are displayed in monochrome mode. According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect state stand out and improve the game interest.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 silences the output sound during the specific effect state, outputs only the execution start sound and does not output the success sound or the failure sound for the change effect. According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect state stand out and to recognize the start of execution of the change effect. Then, the success sound or the failure sound is output at the timing when the monochrome effect ends. According to this, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the specific display such as the hold display or the active display has changed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Modified example of characteristic part 074AK)
In the above-described embodiment, in the specific effect state during the execution of the monochrome effect, the display corresponding to variable display and the background image are in the monochrome mode, but this is just an example. For example, in addition to the display corresponding to the variable display, an image that informs the degree of expectation for the big hit by the color to be displayed, such as the degree of expectation by the color of the displayed character or message, may be in a monochrome mode. According to this, as the production effect of the specific production state, it is possible to make the degree of expectation unrecognizable more suitably, and it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation. On the other hand, on the contrary, it is not an image displayed by lottery on the side of the effect control board 12 (not an image displayed by lottery according to the degree of expectation), but by a command or the like sent from the main board 11 side. An image (special information) for displaying information shall be displayed in a normal mode (for example, full color), not in a monochrome mode. Specifically, it consists only of numbers, for example, odd numbers are displayed in red and even numbers are displayed in blue (displayed in the same color as the decoration pattern), always small patterns that are always visible to the player, special symbols By displaying the number of reservations of 1 and special figure 2 with numbers, the number of reservations that can be specified by the player, and the display of the number of reservations, and the right-handed display, etc., should be controlled so as not to be in the monochrome mode in the monochrome production. Just do it. In addition, since the right-handed display is displayed in the variable probability state, it may be possible to execute the monochrome effect even in the variable probability state. Furthermore, in the normal effect state, the small symbols, the always reserved number display, the right-handed display, etc. may be displayed in a monochrome mode, and in the specific effect state, they may be displayed in another color such as red. According to this, it is possible to recognize the contents suggested by the special information even in the specific effect state, thereby preventing the deterioration of the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the specific effect state, the display corresponding to the variable display (specific display) such as the pending display and the active display is displayed in the first stage "white", but in the normal effect state. It may be displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in , and is displayed only in a specific effect state (for example, it is displayed in gray regardless of the degree of expectation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the suspended display or the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed has been shown, but this is only an example. For example, without executing the process of step 074AKS052 in FIG. 11-8, a monochrome effect may be executed regardless of whether the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the timing for starting execution of the monochrome effect is the start winning timing (that is, the timing at which the game medium has won a prize), but this is just an example. The execution timing of the monochrome effect may be a predetermined timing during the variable display. The execution timing may be such that the player cannot specify to what stage the color of the frame has changed until the end of the monochrome effect. In other words, as long as the monochrome effect can be executed during the execution of the effect of notifying the degree of expectation of the big hit by the displayed color, the execution timing of the monochrome effect may be any timing.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 075AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 075AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 075AK of the present embodiment, unlike the characteristic portion 074AK, the monochrome effect ends by changing the display mode (display color) of the specific display such as the pending display and the active display. That is, the change timing is the end timing of the monochrome effect. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 075AK having such characteristics will be described.

FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing executed in the characterizing portion 075AK. It should be noted that the same numbers as those in the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-1 are given to portions that perform the same processing as the pre-reading notice setting process executed in the characteristic portion 074AK. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-16, in step 074AKS003, after determining the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed, the setting process such as monochrome effect is executed ( step 075AKS001). The monochrome effect setting process of step 075AKS001 is a process of determining whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed, the end timing thereof, and the display mode change pattern of the pending display and the active display.

FIG. 11-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the monochrome effect setting process executed in step 075AKS001 of FIG. 11-16. Note that, in the illustrated example, the same numbers as in FIG. 11-8 are assigned to the portions that perform the same processing as the monochrome effect setting processing in FIG. 11-8. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-17 is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state, as in the monochrome effect setting process of FIG. 11-8. (Step 074AKS051), if it is off (Step 074AKS051; No), whether or not there is a hold (including active display) whose display mode changes before the current hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice That is, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the pending or active display present in the foreground (the display mode for the foreground) changes (step 074AKS051A). If the monochrome effect flag is ON (step 074AKS051; Yes) or if the front display mode changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" (step 075AKS012). Whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" may be determined by confirming the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003 of FIG. 11-16. If the display mode of the active display is "white" (step 075AKS012; No), that is, if the display mode of the active display does not change from the pending display, the effect control CPU 120, according to the number of pending, PT4-4-01 , PT3-1-01, or PT2-2-01 is determined, and the monochrome effect setting processing is terminated. If the display mode of the active display is ``blue'', ``green'', or ``red'' other than ``white'' (step 075AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 indicates whether or not the monochrome effect is executed as a variable display result. Accordingly, it is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-9 (step 074AKS053). After executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054).

If the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode change pattern (step 075AKS013), and ends the monochrome effect setting process. In step 075AKS013, according to the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. A display mode change pattern is determined according to the number of reserved memories indicated by one of the 2 special figure reserved memory number designation commands. If the monochrome effect is to be executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 follows the display mode change pattern determination table (for monochrome) shown in FIG. Determine the display mode change pattern according to the display mode of the active display determined in 074AKS003 and the number of reserved memories indicated by either the first special figure reserved memory number designation command or the second special figure reserved memory number designation command (step 075AKS014).

The display mode change pattern determination table (for monochrome) shown in FIG. 11-18(A) is a table that is referred to for determining the change pattern of the display mode of the suspended display and the active display when executing the monochrome effect. . In the characteristic part 075AK, when the monochrome effect is executed, the change pattern is determined such that only the display mode of the active display is changed without changing the display mode of the suspension display. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the pending display is "white", and the display mode of the active display is "blue" to "red" so that the display mode change pattern is determined. Each display mode change pattern is set accordingly.

In the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-17, after determining the display step change pattern in step 075AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 follows the active display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 11-18(B). The timing for changing the active display is determined to be one of the timings A to C according to the display mode of the active display (step 075AKS015). In this embodiment, "timing A" is the timing before the reach state, that is, the timing immediately before entering the reach state, "timing B" is the timing at the start of the reach effect of super reach, and "timing C" is the timing of super reach. It is the timing of the middle stage of the reach production. That is, "timing A" timing is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, "timing B" is the next earliest timing, and "timing C" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 11-18(B), in the characteristic portion 075AK in this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is a highly expected mode in the order of "timing C" > "timing B" > "timing A". is determined so that the later the timing from the start of the variable display to the change, the higher the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to the display color that the player expects highly. percentage is set.

In the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-17, after step 075AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing immediately after the determined change timing as the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 075AKS016). As a result, the monochrome output process ends at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes, and the active display is displayed in the changed display mode. After executing the process of step 075AKS016, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control for executing the monochrome effect (step 074AKS056), sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and performs the monochrome effect, etc. End the setting process. By executing the monochrome effect execution control of step 074AKS056, the execution of the monochrome effect (monochrome output process) is started. It is the same as the characteristic part 074AK in that it is displayed in the mode. Also, in the specific effect state during monochrome effect execution, the pending display and active display are displayed in the first stage “white” (displayed in a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). , control to mute output sounds such as sound effects and performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome performance, and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. is performed in the same manner as the characteristic portion 074AK.

In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-16, after executing the process of step 075AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 follows the display mode change pattern determined in step 075AKS013 and step 075AKS014 of FIG. A display or a second pending display is displayed (step 075AKS002). After executing the process of step 075AKS002, the same process as the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-1 is performed (the same process as the feature part 074AK is performed).

FIG. 11-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect setting process performed in the variable display start setting process in the characteristic portion 075AK (see FIG. 11-11). The change effect setting processing performed in the characteristic portion 075AK differs in that the processing of steps 075AKS021 to step 075AKS023 is executed in addition to the change effect setting processing performed in the characteristic portion 074AK, but the other points are the same. do. When the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-19 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021). When the monochrome effect flag is off (step 075AKS021; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps 074AKS022 to step 074AKS024 in the same manner as the characteristic portion 074AK. If the monochrome effect flag is set to ON (step 075AKS021; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022). When the display mode of the active display does not change in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the change effect setting process as it is.

When the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change effect pattern, which is the execution pattern of the change effect, to the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-20. According to (step 075AKS023), after setting according to the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 11-17, the change effect setting process is terminated.

11-20 are diagrams showing an example of a change pattern determination table. As shown in the figure, when the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIGS. At the start of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, which is the timing, the changing performance of the failure mode is performed, and at the middle of the super-ready-to-win, which is the timing, the changing performance of the success mode is performed. If the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. At the start of a ready-to-win performance of a certain super ready-to-win, a variation performance pattern of pattern 2 is set to execute a success mode variation performance. If the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 11-17 is timing C, that is, immediately before the ready-to-reach state, the change effect pattern of pattern 3 that executes the change effect of the success mode immediately before the ready-to-reach state that is timing A. is set. Although the illustrated example shows an example in which the change effect of the failure mode is executed at the timing when the display mode of the active display does not change, there may be a pattern in which the change effect is not executed.

FIGS. 11-21 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation when a monochrome effect and a change effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 11-21(A), a state in which a hold is stored as one of the hold displays H1 and a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is being performed. In , output sounds such as sound effects and production sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 for game effects is also lit. When a new game ball wins the first start winning slot, the pending display H2 is displayed, and the display mode of the active display is determined in the pre-reading advance notice setting process of FIGS. When the monochrome effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-21(B), the image display device 5 displays a background image, a hold display, and the like in a monochrome mode, and also produces sound effects and Control is performed to mute the output sound such as the effect sound and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. FIG. 11-21(B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-21(A) is finished. Further, in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display in the pending display H2 is determined to be "red" (step 074AKS003 in FIG. 11-16), and is determined to be the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 (FIG. 11-17 step 075AKS014), and the active display change timing is determined to be timing C (step 075AKS015 in FIG. 11-17). That is, according to the change effect pattern of pattern 1, the change effect of the failure mode and the success mode is executed (see FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20).

As shown in FIG. 11-21(C), when each pending display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is started, the pending display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-21(D), when the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is completed and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H2 is started, as shown in FIG. 11-21(E) , the pending display H2 is displayed as the active display AH. The example shown in FIG. 11-21(E) shows an example of the timing (timing A) immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 enters the ready state. Since the change effect of failure mode and success mode is executed according to the change effect pattern of pattern 1, in the illustrated example, when the change effect of failure mode is performed at the timing (timing A) immediately before the ready-to-win state. It shows about It should be noted that in the changing effect, although the execution start sound, that is, the effect start sound for informing the player that the image of the shooting star has been displayed is output, the success sound and the failure sound are not output. is similar to

After entering the ready-to-win state, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is started (at the timing of timing B), as shown in FIG. At timing C in the middle stage, as shown in FIG. At the end of the performance, the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is turned on, and a success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 11-21(H), by changing the display mode of the active display, the monochrome effect is finished, and the display color of the active display AH becomes visible. In the example shown in FIG. 11-21(H), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 in FIG. , and the variable display result after that is "big hit".

As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 075AK, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and during execution of the monochrome effect (specific effect state), the number of colors of images including pending display and active display is displayed less than in the normal effect state. In the specific production state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the normal production state, and in the normal production state, by executing the change production, the display color of the pending display and the active display is changed to a color according to the expectation level. In the specific effect state, the specific effect state is shifted to the normal effect state at the timing immediately after the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, the performance pattern becomes diverse, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a success mode change effect that changes the display mode of the active display and a failure mode change effect that does not change the display mode of the active display. Then, the monochrome effect is terminated at the timing immediately after the change effect of the success mode is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the active display has changed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 starts the monochrome effect by executing the setting process such as the monochrome effect in the pre-reading notice setting process executed at the timing when the pending display is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game medium wins. Then, after the variable display corresponding to the pending display of the target is started and displayed as the active display, the monochrome presentation is terminated at the timing immediately after the success mode change presentation is executed for the active display. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display color of the active display has changed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display at one of the timings A to C. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18(B), the later the change timing is, the more the display mode changes to the active display with higher expectations. According to this, the effect pattern becomes various and the game interest can be improved.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 075AK)
At least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined. Furthermore, all or part of the features shown in the modification of the feature portion 074AK may be combined.

In the above-described embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes in the specific effect state in which the monochrome effect is being executed is determined by the process of step 075AKS015 in FIG. In addition to this, for example, even in the normal effect state, the timing at which the display mode of the pending display and the active display changes is the timing A in FIG. 11-18 (B). to timing C may be determined. In this case, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes may be determined to be the timing C more frequently in the specific effect state than in the normal effect state. According to this, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the specific effect state during execution of the monochrome effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the timing of ending the monochrome effect is immediately after the display mode of the active display changes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the same timing as the timing of the change. In addition, the timing immediately after the change in the display mode of the pending display, or the timing at which the display mode changes, may be set as the end timing of the monochrome effect, not limited to the display mode of the active display. That is, the end timing of the specific effect state may include at least the timing when the change effect is executed and the display mode (display color) of the pending display or the active display changes. It may be the timing immediately after, or the end timing of the changed variable display. In this case, when the number of reserved memories is "3" or more, the monochrome effect can be executed, and the timing after the display mode changes after the reserved display shifts twice is determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. Just do it. Specifically, in the monochrome effect setting process of FIGS. Counts the number of times pending has shifted since execution began. Then, when the count value is "2" or more, it is determined that the end condition of the monochrome effect is satisfied, and the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes thereafter may be determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. According to this, although the condition for ending the monochrome effect is that the display mode changes, it is possible to secure a viewing period for the monochrome effect, and to improve the effect of the effect.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed has been shown, but this is just an example. Even when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change (that is, when the display mode of the active display does not change, it may be decided to execute the monochrome effect). ). In this case, the monochrome effect may end when the variable display corresponding to the suspension that was the object when it was decided to execute the monochrome effect ends.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration related to the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK, the configuration related to the characteristic portion 074AK, and the configuration related to the characteristic portion 075AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions. For example, in the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, in the characteristic portion 074AK and the characteristic portion 075AK, the change effect during the monochrome effect changes to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. may According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the monochrome effect accompanied by the color change effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 5... Image display device 77AK100... Effect control microprocessor 77AK131... CPU
77AK132 … VDP

Claims (1)

A game machine capable of performing variable display based on entry of a game medium into a starting area and controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
During a predetermined period from the timing corresponding to the entry of the game medium into the starting area to the specific timing during execution of the target variable display, the plurality of effect displays displayed during the predetermined period are changed to a common color. a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect to cause
A special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect at the specific timing,
The first period and the second period partially overlap, and the first period starts before the second period and ends before the second period,
There are a plurality of end timings of the first period, and depending on which end timing, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The special effect executing means does not execute the special effect in the variable display prior to the target variable display during the predetermined period,
The special production execution means is
When the game medium enters the starting area when the display result of the variable display is not displayed in a stop display period, the special effect is started at the timing of entry,
When the game medium enters the starting area during the stop display period, the special effect is started at the timing after the stop display period ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images